JP6713103B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

Conventionally, a game table provided with an image display means is known.

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game table has room for improvement in the image display means.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a feature in image display means.

The above purpose is
A first image display means,
A second image display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The second image display means is an image display means capable of performing the first movement,
The first movement is a movement of a predetermined distance in the first direction in the second display means,
After the first movement of the second image display means is started, first display or second display may be performed,
An image of the first pattern moved in a second direction opposite to the first direction during execution of the first movement is displayed to the player so that the pattern does not move in the first direction. Can be shown,
The first display is a display in which the first image as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the second image display means,
The second display is a display in which the second image as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the second image display means,
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display, the case where the second display is performed is easier than the case where the first display is performed, and the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display.
It is achieved by a gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a feature in image display means.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). 1 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the back side. It is the outline front view which looked at game board 200 of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. It is an example of a display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows a stop display symbol of special figure 2 An example is shown, (c) shows an example of a decorative design, (d) is a figure showing an example of a stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the main control part main processing of the pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of main control part timer interruption processing of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention was equipped. is there. It is a figure which shows the success/failure determination table for a general figure in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and hit time operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the hit/miss determination table for special drawings in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table and the big hit time operation for special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for special figures 2 and the time of a big hit in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric chulong opening production performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric tulong opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect on the decorative pattern display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the lottery table of the pre-reading notice used by the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the lottery table of the notice at the time of a change disclosure (after a big hit determination). It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure explaining the movable body 1002 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining a game production in a pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 16 is a schematic front view of a slot machine 2000 as a gaming table according to a modified example of the present invention as seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 3000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 4000 provided with the memory|storage part which memorize|stores the electronic data which implement|achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home-use television set with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104, which is called an inner frame, is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertical rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened/closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launch device 110. The upper plate 126 provided with, the lower plate 128 for storing the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 are discharged to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. A ball removal button 130, a ball ejection lever 132 for ejecting the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the player's operation, and to a launcher 110 by the player's operation. A ball launching handle 134 for launching the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a chance button 136 for changing the performance mode of various performance devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the operation of the player. A chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like to be performed by the operation of a setter (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a ball for the card unit (CR unit). A ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a lending instruction, a return operation button 142 for instructing the player to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. And). Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

The setting operation unit 137 is a push-button switch that can be pressed by a setter, and includes a confirm (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirm button, a lower button located below the confirm button, and a confirm button. A right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button are provided. Further, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4). The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and an effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub that accommodates a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs a control process and that includes a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game shop clerk. A board case 162, a second sub board case 166 for accommodating a second sub board 164 that constitutes a second sub control section 500 that performs a control process relating to an effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub control section 400, A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170, which configures a payout control unit 600 that performs a control process related to payout of game balls, and has an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop, and a control for launching a game ball A power supply for turning on/off the power supply by configuring a launch board case 176 accommodating a launch board 174 forming a launch control unit 630 for performing processing and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines and operating the game shop staff. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a switch 178 and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control section 300 when operated at power-on, a payout control section 600, and a card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals, and a relay board 188 for relaying between the main board 156, the first sub board 160, etc. and the hall computer etc. for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer etc. And are arranged.

The main board 156, the first sub-board 160, the second sub-board 164, etc. are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power supply board 182, etc. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed. A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 208 at approximately the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The game board 200 of this example is a game board for so-called right-handed machines. In the right hitting machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball firing handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and a left path on the left side of the rendering device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), a variable winning a prize port 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The easiness of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

For each of the normal symbol starting port 229, the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 235, these normal symbol starting port 229, the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball that falls on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball that drops on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the presence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238 and the warp device 242, etc., the game is dropped on the left side path. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, the right-handing machine is used as an example, but a machine other than the right-handing machine may be used.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various images (moving images or still images) used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

At the bottom of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 and , A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as "general symbol", the special symbol as "special symbol", the first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and the second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. Special figure 1 display device 212 and special figure 2 display device 214
Is a display device for displaying a special figure, and is constituted by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment.

The public figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of public figure variable games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the general figure variable games. It is possible to hold it. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Further, around the performance device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, 229, a special figure 1 starting port 230, a special figure 2 starting port 232, and a variable. The winning openings 234 and 235 are arranged.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls include a ball to be paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as “prize ball”) and a ball to be lent to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “rental ball”). May be included) and.

The universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229 are constituted by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the form, one universal figure starting port 228 is arranged on the left side path of the game board 200, and one universal figure starting port 229 is arranged on the right side path. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is arranged in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. , The special figure variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 1 variation game") is started. Note that the ball that has entered the starting port 230 of Toku-zu 1 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Toku-zu 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the blade member 232a is closed, it is not possible to enter a ball, and the universal figure variation game is won, and the universal figure display device is displayed. When 210 hits the stop symbol and displays it, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. , The special figure variation game by the special figure 2 display device 214 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 2 variation game") is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called big winning openings or attackers, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one of them is installed. The variable winning a prize ports 234 and 235 are respectively provided with openable and closable door members, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door members are closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special figure variation game is won, for example, one door member of the variable winning a prize ports 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing). Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The balls that enter the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In the pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and launches the launch rod. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the 146 and the launching mallet 148 to be launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the winning holes (general winning holes 226, variable winning holes 234, 235) and Out by simply winning at the starting opening (Special 1 starting opening 230, Special 2 starting opening 232), without winning any winning openings or starting openings, or by simply passing through the universal starting openings 228, 229. Reach mouth 240.

Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, the warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and the front stage 244 are arranged in the rolling area of the game ball, and the rendering movable body 224 is placed in the rolling area of the gaming ball. It is arranged. In addition, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is arranged on the upper right side of the production movable body 224. The fourth symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged vertically side by side. LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps, for example. The upper lamp corresponds to Toku-zu 1, and the lower lamp corresponds to Toku-zu 2. The fourth symbol display device 248 may be provided with only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, as in this example, the fourth symbol display device may be provided in the rendering device 206 (center accessory). Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the front stage 244 below the front of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200, and the passing ball is located at the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball 230 is provided.

The production movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The production movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that it can move in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the respective doors are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portions of the holes of the lattice are completely closed (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 for controlling, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit according to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured by a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. ..

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) 318 (which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 210 In order to perform display control of the drive circuit 326 for performing the operation and various status display portions 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). Drive circuit 330, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and a door member of the variable winning port 234, 235, and the like. Are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has been won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is similarly latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume control switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be output, an operation unit sensor (not shown) that detects pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors. The sensor circuit 428 which outputs to the basic circuit 402, and the image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 is read out, a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436, and the image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Is connected to a VDP (video display processor) 434 for displaying.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. To the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive for controlling the game underframe lamp 542. A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental ball. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the like, and the payout device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIG. 5A to FIG. 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of diagrams and general drawings will be described. FIG. 5(a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and FIG. 5(b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the fact that the ball has entered the special opening 2 starting opening 232. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all the seven segments are turned on and one central segment is turned on. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. .. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 After a lapse of time, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present embodiment, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". A series of displays up to this is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed multiple times.

In FIG. 5(a), seven types of special symbols “Special symbol A” to “Special symbol G” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special symbol 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the drawing show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, "Special drawing B" is a 7R special jackpot design, and "Special drawing C" is a 7R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot and the number of rounds is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the special figure variation game after the jackpot game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special figure probable variation” or simply “probable variation”), and the state with a low probability is a special figure. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends, after the 7R special big hit game ends and after the 7R big hit game ends, both shift to the time saving state (electric power support state). Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probability change of universal figure”), and the state not in the short period of time is referred to as low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special drawing A" and the 7R special jackpot symbol "special drawing B" are the symbols that become the special symbol high probability general symbol high probability state after the jackpot game, and are the 7R jackpot symbols. “Special map C” is a symbol that becomes a special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B" and "special drawing C" are symbols in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively large.

"Special drawing D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, “Special drawing D” is 2R, which is different from “Special drawing A” which is 15R and “Special drawing B” which is 7R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot pattern called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "Special map E" is stopped and displayed in the special map low probability general figure low probability state, the special map high probability general figure low probability state (so-called after the jackpot game (opening time 100 ms x 2R) ends. If the "special map E" is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special probability low probability state, the special map high probability normal state is reached after the jackpot game (opening time 29000 ms x 2R) ends. The state shifts to the high probability state (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). That is, the "special map E" is the operation state during the big hit game and the game state to be transferred after that depending on the game state when the stop display is performed (in this example, whether or not it is the special figure low probability general figure low probability state) It is a different design.

"Special map F" is a small hit symbol, and is a special map low probability general figure low probability state. In addition, the “special figure G” is a deviating symbol, which is a symbol having a relatively small advantage for the player.

In FIG. 5(b), four types of special drawings, “special drawing a” to “special drawing d”, are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 2. The "special drawing a" is a 15R special jackpot design, the "special drawing b" is a 7R special jackpot design, the "special drawing c" is a 7R jackpot design, and the "special drawing d" is a falling design. In the present embodiment, 7 types of special drawings (5 kinds of them are big hits) are used as the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 1, whereas the special drawing 2 is used. As the stop symbol mode, four kinds of special drawings of “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” (of which three kinds are big hits) are used. With such a configuration, it may be possible to provide a difference in advantage between the special figures 1 and 2 without changing the probability of a big hit and the probability of a probability change of the big hit. In this example, the big hit in Toku-zu 1 includes a sudden probability change or latent probability change in which almost no balls are thrown, whereas the big hit in Toku-zu 2 does not include a sudden probability change or latent probability change. The advantage of Toku-zu 2 is higher than that of Toku-zu 1.

FIG. 5(c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The "decoration 1" to "decoration 9" and "decoration 10" represent the numbers "1" to "9" and "0", respectively. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting orifice sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting orifice 232. In the design display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... → "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

And 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A", 7R special jackpot of "Special drawing B", 7R big jackpot of "Special drawing C", 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing a", 7R special jackpot of "Special drawing b" , In the case of notifying the 7R big hit of "special figure c", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-" Decoration 2-decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. In order to explicitly notify the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A" and the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing a", a symbol combination in which three identical odd decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3- "Decorative 3" and "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7") are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called "special figure E" latent probability change (hidden probability change) or a small hit of "special figure F", "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. To do. When notifying a 2R big hit called a sudden change of "special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the deviation of “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 5(d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" and "Public figure B" which are hit symbols, and "Public figure C" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229, the universal figure display device 210 has all seven segments turned on and one in the center. Repeatedly illuminate the segment of “Perform variable display”. Then, when notifying that the universal figure variation game is won, "Public figure A" or "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying that the universal figure variation game is out, "General figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows operation and sets initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply which the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value that determines a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1 to the sub control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not the power is restored to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off). When making the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is ON (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. When the power status information is information indicating suspend, 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is all added to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum result has a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. If the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power-off state has been restored, and in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this time, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 ( In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

In step S115, which is subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, the initial values of the four random number counters for respectively generating the universal figure winning random number value, the universal figure random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are generated. The four initial value generating random number counters, and the two random number counters for generating the normal figure fluctuation time determining random number value and the special figure fluctuation time determining random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time, and is acquired. The value is incremented by 1 and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in the basic random number initial value updating process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Is started in a predetermined cycle.

First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (the processing abnormality is not detected). (In this example, once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt), the restart is performed.

In step S205 following step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower plate full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I/O 310. The presence/absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before in each RAM detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

In step S205, information about the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In step S205, information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). If it matches with the information indicating that the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, or the normal starting opening 228. It is determined that there is a passage at 229. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last, no detection signal before, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in subsequent step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the main control unit 300 then uses the universal figure winning random number value, the universal figure. The four random number counters for respectively generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Further, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area is acquired. Set to.

For example, a result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value has made one round next time, a random number counter for generating a universal figure random number value, a special figure 1 random number value generator The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for generating the random number and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number has completed one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for obtaining the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211, which is subsequent to step S209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213 subsequent to step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the universal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing/stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, and the time for changing/stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change/stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for measuring the closing time, the predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

In step S215, which is subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229, the prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or each starting hole. The value of the number storage area is read, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls storage area.

In step S217, which is subsequent to step S215, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, the universal figure starting openings 228, 229, and the variable winning openings 234, 235 have been won. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

If there is a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random value generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special value 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special value 1 random number value random number counter provided in the RAM 308 One random number value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number storage area, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value with the highest (first) holding order is erased every time the number of special figure 1 holding decreases by one. At the same time, the processing is performed so that the retention order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of special maps 1 reserved increases by one, a new special map 1 is added to the next reservation order of the data of the special map 1 winning random number value and the special map 1 random number value with the lowest (last) reservation order. The data of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value pair are written.

When there is a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random value generation circuit 318. The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by subjecting the value stored in the value storage register to predetermined processing is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number storage area, each time the number of special figure 2 holding decreases by 1, the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number group with the highest holding order is erased and the remaining The special order 2 winning random number value and the special order 2 random number value data are processed so that the holding order of the data is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of special map 2 held increases by one, a new special map 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest holding order. And the data of the special figure 2 random number set is written.

In addition, special figure 1 starting information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 starting information (set of special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 or universal figure starting port 229, and if the corresponding universal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the universal figure winning random number generation random number counter. It is acquired as a winning random number value, and the universal figure random number value is acquired from the universal figure random number generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the universal figure random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The same number of sets of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value in the universal figure random number storage area are stored as the same as the number of universal figure reservations stored in the universal figure reservation number storage area. In the universal figure random number storage area, each time the number of pending figure numbers decreases by one, the data of the universal figure winning random number value and universal figure random number value with the highest (first) holding order is erased and the remaining The data of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value are processed so that the holding order of the data is incremented by one. In addition, as the number of reserved universal figures increases by one, a new universal figure winning random value and a new universal figure winning random number value are added to the next pending order of the data of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value with the lowest (last) pending order. The data of a set of random numbers for general use is written. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234. When the variable winning port 235 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 235.

In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221 subsequent to step S219, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state updating process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly lit and turned off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

In addition, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure variation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the public figure hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the display mode of FIG. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is set in the setting area. By performing this control, the public figure display device 210 is either a hit symbol (Public symbol A or B in FIG. 5(d)) or a deviating symbol (Public symbol C in FIG. 5(d)). The symbol is confirmed and displayed. After that, after a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member is set to the solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the open state 232a is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Also, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening/closing, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is out of order, the universal figure per-flag is turned off. When the universal figure hit flag is off, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure related lottery process, the number of the universal figure variation games and the universal figure variation games that are not held are controlled without opening/closing the special figure 2 starting port 232. Is set to 1 or more as a start condition, the routine is executed using the earliest universal figure winning random number value and universal figure random number value in the universal figure random value storage area.

The main control unit 300 obtains the universal figure starting information (a pair of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the universal figure random number storage area, Based on the universal figure winning random number value in the acquired universal figure starting information, the value of the universal figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like, a table for determining a win or failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 9A and 9B described later). Refer to) to determine whether to win or not to win (judgment). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general figure random number value in the acquired general figure starting information and the determined result of hit/miss determination, etc., hits the general figure determination table (shown in FIG. 9C) stored in the ROM 306. (See the time operation table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the general figure. Next, the main control unit 300, for example, based on the determined hit/miss determination result, the stop symbol, the obtained random number for determining the universal figure fluctuation time, and the like, stored in the ROM 306 of various tables (for example, a timer number selection not shown). The fluctuation display time (timer number) of the general figure is determined using the table), and the fluctuation display time is stored in the general figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure fluctuation display time.

The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest universal figure starting information from the universal figure random number storage area, deletes the earliest universal figure starting information from the universal figure random value storage area, and stores the universal figure holding number. Subtract 1 from the number of reserved universal maps in the area. At this time, the universal figure starting information taken out from the universal figure random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the universal figure starting information stored in this temporary area. Good.

The main control unit 300 turns on the universal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 when the win/no win determination result is a win (win), and sets the universal figure hit flag off when the win is not successful.

Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinguishing drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a deviation flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. .. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on 5B, the special figure a and the 7R big hit flag are on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b and the 7R big hit flag are on, and the special figure probability variation flag is off The special figure c and the special flag d are turned on when the off flag is turned on so that the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on and off, and the special area is set in the RAM 308. FIG. 2 A setting indicating that the stop display is being performed is made. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 fluctuating game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability changes stored in the probability change storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability changes, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag Turn off.

Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described below, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 is detected) A solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 (a part of various solenoids 332). And outputs a signal for holding the door member in the open state, and sets information indicating the open period in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening/closing the door member of the variable winning a prize ports 234, 235, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, the opening/closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Toku-zu, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Toku-zu 1), and ended. In the special figure 2 state update process started at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is waited for. In order to set the setting, information indicating the production standby period is set in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the universal figure, compared to the low probability state of the universal figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the universal variation game. In addition, in the general figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the general figure low probability state (general figure shortness). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability Change, Phenomenon Change Short, and Den Chu Extension is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234, 235 during the big hit game, and a large number of special figure 2 starting ports 232 until the game balls enter. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the gambling property is increased.

If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number storage unit (for example, 10000 times) is set in the RAM 308, at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is ON, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), The special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the contents described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. However, in this example, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, so the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0). The special figure 1 state update processing started at different timings is different from the special figure 2 state update processing. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A and 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. When the figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure E, and the small hit flag is on In the special area F, and when the disengagement flag is turned on, the 7-segment LED forming the special figure 1 display device 212 is turned on/off to control the special area G. To make a setting indicating that the special figure 1 is in stop display. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fixed display of any one symbol of special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive and special figure 2 which is on hold Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and special figure 1 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special map 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of pending special game 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the pending special game 1 variable games are not performed. Further, the notification of the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure variation game is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting opening 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is prioritized over the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). .. Therefore, it may be easy to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the game state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the ROM 306 A big hit or a small hit (in this example, a small hit can be selected only in Toku-zu 1) is made by using the hit/miss determination table (see FIGS. 10A to 10D described later) stored in Whether or not it is determined (whether it is true or false). Then, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information and the determined hit/miss judgment result, etc., the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 11A). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special figure 2 is determined by using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12(a). Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit/miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table (not shown)).

The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage is started with priority over the low advantage figure 1 variation game, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending. It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. In addition, neither the special figure 2 variation game nor the special figure 1 variation game is given priority, and the special figure variation game related to each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 is started in the order in which the special opening variation game is won in the starting mouth. It may be forward change. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of holdings.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed depending on the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update By performing the processing and the special figure-related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. When a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or may be configured to display a plurality of special lottery results in one area. In addition, when the fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are simultaneously performed, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may influence the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a prize production start command, an end production start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, a prefetch result information command , Etc.), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as the command type, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command relating to a universal figure are also included.

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. Also, if the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command of the special figure, the command data has various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc., special figure related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, including the information indicating the timer number selected in step 1, including various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of a start command and end production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a big hit round number designation command, information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, big hit round number, etc. I am trying to include it. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and winning at the variable winning ports 234 and 235. It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, the command data is information indicating the type of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and the like. Included in.

In addition, if the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command of the universal figure, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per flag, a universal symbol deviation flag, a universal symbol probability variation flag, and a universal symbol related lottery process. Including the information about the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the general pattern, information indicating the value of the per-universal-diagram flag, the general-university flag, the general-probability fluctuation flag, etc. Is included.

Further, in the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stores values of various types of big hit flags, small hit flags, out-of-match flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing, and special figure The information indicating the timer number selected in FIG. 2 related lottery processing, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information and the special figure probability variation flag output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence/absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence/absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower tray full tank error. .. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening/closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize ports 234, 235, and the general figure display device 210, special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG.

FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the hit/miss determination processing. The pre-judgment result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 8B to 8E) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit that stores the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (the first place) is erased every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading is decreased, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the ranking of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing the number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 prefetch results having the lowest rank.

In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number stored area. The comparison is made with the number of prefetches in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increased when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning/judging determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is changed to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success/failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. It is performed by comparing with the number of pre-reading of special figure 1 stored in. When it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and when it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit timer allocation is performed. The process returns to the prize receiving process (step S217) of the included process.

In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not the non-electric power support is being performed, it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of special figure 1 winning random number values and special figure 1 random number values) is specified before the winning/judging process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information, the special figure 1 related lottery Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main controller timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main controller timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the power support. Alternatively, whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), if the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

8B to 8E exemplify a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8B, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, the storage area “holding 1” stores “special drawing G” (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “holding 2” stores stop symbol information “special drawing G”. "(Off)" is stored, "special drawing F" (small hit) is stored in the storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing A" is stored in the storage area "hold 4" as stop symbol information. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8C, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 8(c), "special drawing d" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In addition, in FIG. 8C, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 8D shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 8D, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), in each of the storage areas of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage section, not the stop symbol information, but the "timer number" indicating the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is the prefetch result. May be stored as In the example shown in FIG. 8E, "timer 3" is stored in the storage area "hold 1" as timer number information, "timer 5" is stored in the storage area "hold 2" as timer number information, Timer number information is not stored in the storage areas “hold 3” and “hold 4”. In addition, in FIG. 8E, the state in which the timer number information is not stored is described as “none”. Further, when the timer number information is stored in each storage area of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, the timer number may be set to correspond to the result of win/fail.

In the above description, the stop symbol and the timer number are pre-determined, and the example in which the stop symbol information and the timer number information are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit has been given. It may be stored in the result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

Next, various tables used in the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of a win/loss determination table used when the win/loss determination is performed in the universal figure related lottery process (step S223). The hit/no hit determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B includes items of “universal figure probability”, “random number range”, and “whether hit/miss”. The item of “universal figure probability” indicates a general figure probability (low probability of general figure or high probability of general figure) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical value range to be compared with the acquired universal figure winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the universal figure winning random number value of this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

The win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a win/loss determination table for a universal figure that is used when the probability of universal figure at the time of win/loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this hit/miss determination table is used, the winning probability is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the outfall probability is 99/100.

The win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 9(b) is a win/loss determination table for a universal figure used when the probability of a universal figure at the time of win/loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 9B, when this hit/miss determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. Comparing this win/loss determination table with the win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, in the universal figure high probability state (during time reduction operation), only the hit may be designed to be selected. Further, the probability of deviation may be set to be higher than 0% at the time saving operation, but at the time saving operation, the probability that the hit is selected is made higher than at the time saving non-operation (normal probability low state).

FIG. 9C shows a table of symbol distribution and hitting operation for general purpose. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the universal figure random number value when determining the stopped symbol in the universal symbol related lottery process (step S223), and the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, for each symbol) It is equal to the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9(c), the distribution rate of each winning symbol in the case where the hit determination result of the universal figure variation game is a win, the universal figure A is 50%, and the universal figure B is also 50%. Universal drawings A and B are symbols in which the electric Chu opening operation is executed after the universal character variation game. It should be noted that since there is only one out-of-drawing pattern of the general drawing C selected in the case where the hit/miss determination result is out of alignment, in the case of the out-of-contact, the general drawing C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the universal figure C is selected, the electric charge opening operation is not executed after the universal figure variation game.

As shown in FIG. 9( c ), after the universal figure A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electric tube) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing A is not in time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000-10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing A is the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and again opened for 1800 ms, then, It is closed for about 2000 ms and opened again for 1800 ms.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, after the universal figure B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electric tube) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing B is not in the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the power tube 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing B is the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for 1450 ms, and again. It is closed for about 2000 ms and opened again for 1450 ms.

FIGS. 10A to 10D show examples of win/loss determination tables used when the win/loss determination is performed in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The win/loss determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “win/fall determination result”. The item of “special map probability” indicates a special map probability (low probability of special map or high probability of special map) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical value range to be compared with the obtained special figure 2 winning random number value or special figure 1 winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are both 0 to 65535 (the width of the numerical range is 65536).

The win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 10A is a win/loss determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of win/loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this hit/miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299 (=219/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399 (=165/ 65536).

The win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 10B is a win/loss determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of win/loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this hit/miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30 (=2185/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399. Comparing this win/loss determination table with the win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 10A, the probability of a big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of a small hit is the same.

The win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 10C is a win/loss determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of win/loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10(c), when this hit/miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is 0.

The win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 10D is a win/loss determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of win/loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this hit/miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is 0. Comparing this win/loss determination table with the win/loss determination table shown in FIG. 10C, the probability of a big hit is about 10 times.

FIG. 11A shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is a distribution ratio of random number ranges for each symbol that is compared with the random number value of Special symbol 1 when determining a stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231) (that is, each It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 11(a), the distribution ratio of each jackpot symbol in the case where the winning/discarding judgment result of the special game 1 variation game is a big hit is 30% in the special map A (15R special big hit), and the special map B. (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, and special figure E (latent probability change big hit) is 10%. is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E except for special drawing C are symbols in which the probability change operates after the end of the big hit game. The ratio of the probability variation big hit (special characteristics A, B, D, E) in the big hit of the special game 1 variation game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

Special figures A, B, D are game states (high probability of special figure, low probability of special figure, high probability of ordinary figure (at time saving operation), low probability of ordinary figure (at time of not working) Regardless of the time)), it is a design in which time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the big hit game is over. Special drawing C, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit determination, is a symbol that the time saving (time saving frequency 100 times) operates after the big hit game is over. The special figure E is a symbol in which the time saving is activated after the jackpot game is over, only when the game state at the time of the hit determination is the special figure high probability state or the general figure high probability state. That is, when the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, the time saving does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, if the special map E is displayed as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability general figure low probability state in succession multiple times, the time saving does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability general figure. (It becomes a low-probability state), but after the stop display after the second time, the time saving works (it becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state). Special figure 1 The probability that the time saving is given in the big hit of the variation game is 90% in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, 100% in the other game states.

In this example, there are only one type of each of the small hit symbol and the off symbol in the special figure 1 variation game. Therefore, if the special game 1 variation game win/loss determination result is a small hit, the special map F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special diagram 1 random number value, and the special game 1 variable game win/loss determination result is If it is out of alignment, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random number value of the special figure 1. However, as with the big hit symbols, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and out-of-match symbols may be provided and may be determined by lottery using the random number value of Toku-zu.

FIG. 11B shows an example of a big hit operation in each symbol of Toku-zu 1. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the big hit game after the special map A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after the special map B or the special map C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the big hit game after the special map D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened. 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R.

As for the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state when the symbol is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the jackpot game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened twice for 100 ms at one opening opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state and in the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 12A shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is a distribution ratio of random number ranges for each symbol that is compared with the random number of Special symbol 2 when determining a stopped symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229) (that is, each It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 12(a), the distribution rate of each jackpot symbol in the case where the hit determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. The special figures a and b are symbols in which the probability change operates after the jackpot game is over. Proportion of probability variation big hit (special figure a, b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation game big hit, namely, probability variation probability is 75% same as the probability variation probability of special figure 1 fluctuation game.

Special figures a and b are game states (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, general figure high probability (time saving operation), general figure low probability (time saving non-operation) at the time of judgment of judgment (when the symbol is stopped) ) Regardless of, it is a design in which time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the big hit game ends. Special figure c, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit determination, is a symbol that the time saving (time saving number 100 times) operates after the big hit game ends. Special figure 2 The probability that the time saving is given in the big hit of the variation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variation game. Therefore, when the winning/decision result of the special figure 2 variation game is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random number value of the special figure 2. However, like the jackpot pattern, a plurality of outlier symbols may be provided and may be determined by lottery using the special figure 2 random number value.

FIG.12(b) has shown the example of the operation|movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the jackpot game, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being shortened compared to the special figure 1, and has a long attacker opening time (or a large R number). Therefore, it can be considered that Toku-zu 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Toku-zu 1.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input/output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. Of the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric tulong opening effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S411 subsequent to step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136.

In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S417 following step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub control unit main process (step S421), and a process for updating other random number values for presentation is performed. And so on.

FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, a transfer instruction of image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, 1 stored in the display area not specified in the drawing area
The image of the frame is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set the instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for incoming signal.

In step S705, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701. Therefore, the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S711, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1) and the process ends.

FIG. 14A shows the flow of the electric tulong opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric chu long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the universal figure changing game, and the special figure 2 starting opening (electrical chu) 232 is opened for a long time and/or a plurality of times when the regular figure changing game is won (hereinafter , Sometimes referred to as a long opening) is a production that fuels whether or not to do. In addition, even after the universal figure fluctuation stop, the electric chu long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during electric chu opening!") may be continued based on the general figure stop symbol.

The electric tulong opening effect process shown in FIG. 14A is the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 of FIG. It is executed when the (start rotation) command is received.

First, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric tulong opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of the electric tulong opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric tulong opening effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric tulong opening effect is restricted.
For example, in the display darkness when the entire image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is completely black, even if the electric chulong opening effect is executed, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chulong opening effect cannot be obtained. .. Therefore, in such a case, the electric tulong opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the hit/miss determination result of the special figure variation game during display darkness. Further, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not in the dark display, and the variation time of the universal figure variation game is long enough to execute the electric tulong opening effect, the game is played. It is possible to execute an electric chulong opening effect that can entertain the person. Therefore, in such a case, the electric turong opening effect execution regulation flag is turned off based on the effect based on the result of the determination of the special figure variation game and the demonstration effect.

If the electric chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

If the electric chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric chu-long opening effect can be executed and proceeds to step S803 to start the symbol variation (rotation start) of the universal figure. The command data of the command is referred to and the information relating to the universal figure hit flag and the universal figure out-of-flag flag is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the hit/no hit determination result of the universal figure fluctuation game is hit.

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the hit/miss determination result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and from the command data of the symbol variation start (rotation start) command of the universal figure to the universal figure. By referring to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the universal figure variation game is the universal symbol A.

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the universal figure variation game is the universal figure A, the process proceeds to step S807, and the production of the production type “success pattern” is selected to open the electric chulong. Set as a performance. Next, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric tulong opening effect based on the "success pattern", ends the present processing, and effects control of the main processing. It returns to a process (step S409).

If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop pattern of the universal figure fluctuation game is not the universal figure A, the process proceeds to step S811, and the production of the production type "failure pattern A" is selected to open the electric chulong. Set as a performance. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric tulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern A", ends this processing, and effects of the main processing. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the hit/no hit determination result for the universal figure variation game is not a hit, the process proceeds to step S815, and executes the electric Chulong opening false (gase) effect execution lottery process. In the electric chulong opening false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for the electric chulong opening pseudo effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 and stored in the ROM 406. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit.

The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric tulong opening fake effect based on the result of the hit/miss determination in step S815 (step S817).

If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric Chulong opening fake effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to Step S821, and an effect whose production type is "failure pattern B" is selected and set as the electric Chulong opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for electric tulong opening effect based on "failure pattern B", ends this processing, and effects of main processing. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric tulong opening fake effect is not to be executed, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric tulong opening effect, ends the present processing, and ends the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

In the processing of the electric chu long opening effect shown in FIG. 14, when the electric chu long opening effect execution regulation flag is off, if the winning is the electric chu long opening effect, the electric chu long opening effect is always performed. It is also possible to perform the execution lottery as in the case of the failure and execute the effect only when the lottery is won. In addition, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set when the electric Chu is opened for a short time (short opening B), and the failure pattern is set when the electric Chu is not opened (General drawing C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general drawing B) and a deviating (general drawing C).

FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 14B shows a display effect executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and the background effect named "Land Stage" is executed. On the front of the background effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern in which "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by the downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A variation icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side of the effect display area 208d, and a variation icon having a pattern simulating an automobile is displayed. On the right side of the variable icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying the hold of the special figure is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern simulating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side of the effect display area 208d, the electric tulong opening effect area d is arranged. The public figure fluctuation game is started on the public figure display device 210 (not shown), the execution of the electric chu long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric chu long opening effect is executed in the electric chu long opening effect area d. As a Den Churon opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed along with the display of "help chance lottery", and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is selected to win the universal figure variation game. A stirrup production is performed that makes the player expect to open long. As shown in FIG. 14B, a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. A part of the right side area of the special figure reservation display area c is also hidden. In this way, if the electric chulong opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or if the variable display of the decorative pattern makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the electric turong opening effect There may be

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S901 of FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input/output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S903 subsequent to step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing shifts to step S905. .. In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S913 subsequent to step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Then, the process returns to step S903.

FIG. 15B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

FIG. 15C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S1103 subsequent to step S1101, update processing of the effect random number value and the like are performed.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Example 1)
16 and 17 show examples of effect display in Example 1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 16(a) to (r) and FIGS. 17(a) to (h) show the effect display state for each time point in this order in time series. 16(a) to (r) and FIGS. 17(a) to (h), the schematic pattern front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Only the display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are extracted and shown. In each figure, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a downward thick white arrow. Further, the unlit portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit parts are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all the segments of the special figure 1 display device 212 are shown in white indicates that the variable display of the special figure 1 is being performed. This also applies to the special figure 2 display device 214.

Further, in each of FIGS. 16(a) to (r) and FIGS. 17(a) to (h), a circle capable of displaying the fourth symbol instead of providing the fourth symbol display device 248 shown in FIG. The fourth symbol display area 920 having a shape is provided in the lower right corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol is a symbol showing whether or not the special figure variation game is being executed. During execution of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variation game, the fourth symbol of the white circle and the fourth symbol of the black circle are alternately displayed as if the fourth symbol display area 920 is blinking (hereinafter, " (Variation display of the fourth symbol)).Also, in the fourth symbol display area 920, it is possible to inform the decision result of the special figure variation game. If the determination result is a big hit, the fourth symbol of the red circle is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 920, and if the determination result of the special figure variation game is out of favor, the fourth symbol display area 920 The blue circular fourth symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the area surrounded by a square frame at the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each drawing is a variable icon display area 800 capable of displaying a variable icon. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area 800 when the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the variable icons in the variable icon display area 800, it is possible to notify (advance the relevant variation) whether the special figure variation game is successful or not with a predetermined reliability. The frame-shaped image on the outer periphery of the variable icon display area 800 may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 800). , May be always displayed or may not be always displayed.

In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 16A, a region below the effect display region 208d, which is adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display region 800 and is surrounded by a virtual rectangle of a horizontally long rectangle, is a special figure 1 It is a special figure 1 hold icon display area capable of displaying a hold icon and a special figure 1 pedestal image 900 which is visually recognized as placing the special figure 1 hold icon. The lower edge of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of this example matches the lower edge of the image display area of the decorative symbol display area 208.

In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, it is possible to display one or more special figure 1 hold icons. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the number of special figure 1 hold icons can be notified by the number of special figure 1 hold icons, and the special feature relating to the hold is displayed by the display mode of each special figure 1 hold icon. Figure 1 It is possible to inform (pre-reading notice) of the success or failure of the variable game with a predetermined reliability.

The special figure 1 pedestal image (hereinafter, sometimes abbreviated as “special figure 1 pedestal”) 900 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The special figure 1 pedestal 900 of this example can be displayed so that a maximum of four special figure 1 hold icons can be placed, and from left to right, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. It is roughly divided into four areas. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth reservation orders, respectively. That is, the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) hold icon can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the second to fourth areas have the second to fourth icons. The special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold can be displayed. In the present example, the numbers 1 to 4 are displayed in the first to fourth regions of the pedestal 1 pedestal 900, respectively, and the positions of the first to fourth regions are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. -It is possible to omit the indication of the position of the fourth region.

The special figure 1 hold icon displayed on the special figure 1 pedestal 900 may be displayed in a display size different from the variable icon (for example, a display size smaller than the variable icon). As a result, the special figure 1 hold icon and the variable icon may be easily identified.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 16G, the area surrounded by the vertically long rectangular virtual broken line frame adjacent to the right edge of the effect display area 208d is the special figure 2 hold icon and the special figure 2 hold icon. The special figure 2 hold icon display area capable of displaying the special figure 2 pedestal image 910 which is visually recognized as being placed. The upper edge of the special figure 2 hold icon display area of this example matches the upper edge of the image display area of the decorative symbol display area 208.

In the special figure 2 hold icon display area, one or more special figure 2 hold icons can be displayed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area, the number of special figure 2 hold icons can be notified by the number of special figure 2 hold icons. FIG. 2 It is possible to notify (pre-reading notice) whether or not the variable game is successful with a predetermined reliability.

The special figure 2 pedestal image (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “special figure 2 pedestal”) 910 has a vertically long rectangular shape. The special figure 2 pedestal 910 of this example can be displayed so that up to four special figure 2 hold icons can be placed, and from the bottom to the top, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. It is roughly divided into four areas. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth reservation orders, respectively. That is, the special area 2 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) hold icon can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the second to fourth areas can be displayed in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold can be displayed. In this example, the numbers 1 to 4 are displayed in the first to fourth regions of the special figure 2 pedestal 910, respectively, and the positions of the first to fourth regions are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. -It is possible to omit the indication of the position of the fourth region.

The special figure 2 hold icon displayed on the special figure 2 pedestal 910 may be displayed in a display size different from the variable icon (for example, a display size smaller than the variable icon). As a result, the special figure 2 hold icon and the variable icon may be easily identified.

FIG. 16A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variation game. The special map 1 display device 212 displays the special map G (offset pattern) in a stopped state. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure d which is the stop design of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game (departure design) is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on to notify that the number of operation holding balls in special figure 1 (the number of holdings in special figure 1) is one. All the LEDs of the 2-holding lamp 220 are turned off, and it is notified that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is 0.

In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 7-" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of judgment of the special game 1 variation game is out of alignment "Decorative 2 -decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 920, a blue fourth symbol (indicated by upward hatching in the figure) circular symbol for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is a white circle. In the present embodiment, the white circular display mode is set as the default display mode. Further, in the variable icon display area 800, a deletion animation of the variable icon 700 is executed. For example, a mode in which the transparency (transparency) of the variable icon is gradually increased is set as the default mode of the deletion animation. In FIG. 16A, the variable icon 700 is deleted in the default mode. Further, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 and the special figure 2 hold icon 911 are not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

FIG. 16(b) shows that the suspension of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed, and the left middle right symbol display area 2
The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in 08a to 208c, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 920. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and the fact that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 0 is notified. In the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the fact that the hold of special figure 1 has decreased is notified almost at the same time as the start of the special figure 1 variation game.

In addition, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, between the hold and variation icons. The moving animation of is executed. In the moving animation between the hold/variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 becomes the change icon 801 and moves to the change icon display area 800. FIG. 16B shows a state in which the variable icon 801 has completed the movement into the variable icon display area 800, and the movement animation between the hold and variable icons has ended. The display mode of the variation icon 801 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901.

FIG. 16C shows a state in which the holding of special figure 2 is increased by 1 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the hold of the special figure 2 has increased from 0 to 1. Further, in the fourth symbol display area 920, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. An animation in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 gradually descends from the upper right side of the image display area to a predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area based on the fact that the special figure 2 hold is increased from 0 to 1 ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "special figure 2 pedestal movement animation") is started. Further, when the hold of the special figure 2 increases, execution of the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 is started. The hold increase animation is an animation showing how the hold icon indicating the number of holds increases.

16D to 16G show a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is continuing and the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the special hold increase animation 1 of special figure 2 are started to ended. There is. In the fourth symbol display area 920, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. FIG. 16D shows a state in which the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the hold increase animation 1 of special figure 2 are started. In the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is gradually lowered from the upper right side of the image display area so that the first area can be seen. In the special hold increase animation 1 of special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 whose display mode is a white quadrangle is located to the left of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910, and descends together with the special figure 2 pedestal 910. Is displayed. In addition, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 gradually expands the display size while rotating around the center as a rotation axis. FIG. 16E shows a state in which the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the hold increase animation 1 of special figure 2 are being executed. In the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is further lowered to display the first to second areas. In the special hold 2 increase animation 1 of special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is located on the left side of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910, and is further lowered together with the special figure 2 pedestal 910. ing. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 further expands the display size while rotating around the center as a rotation axis. FIG. 16F shows a state in which the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the hold increase animation 1 of special figure 2 are being executed. In the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is further lowered so that the first to third areas can be seen. In the special hold 2 increase animation 1 of special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is located on the left side of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910, and is further lowered together with the special figure 2 pedestal 910. ing. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 further expands the display size while rotating around the center as a rotation axis. FIG. 16G shows a state in which the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the pending increase animation 1 of special figure 2 are finished. In the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, it is displayed that the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is further lowered and is visible at the predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In the special increase animation 1 of special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is located on the left side of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910, and further descends together with the special figure 2 pedestal 910. It is indicated that the pedestal 910 is stopped at a position adjacent to the left of the first area.

Since the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 is executed in accordance with the execution of the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 descends as the special figure 2 pedestal 910 descends.

Further, according to the change in the display of the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 being executed, the visibility of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the special figure 1 variable game and the display such as the advance notice may be continuously changed. .. Further, the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 in the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 has a higher display priority than the variable display of the decorative pattern and the display of the pre-reading notice, but the variable display of the decorative pattern and the pre-reading are displayed. The display priority may be lower than the display of the notice. In the present embodiment, since the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 has a higher display priority than the variable display of the decorative pattern, when these display images are displayed overlapping in the effect display area 208d. The display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is displayed in front of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 16(h) shows a state in which the holding of special figure 2 is increased by 1 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 reservation is increased from 1 to 2. Further, in the fourth symbol display area 920, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. When the hold of special figure 2 increases, execution of the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 2 is started.

16(i) to (l) show that the special figure 1 variation game is continuing and the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 2 starts and ends. In this state, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area while the whole is visible. 16(i) to 16(k) show a state in which the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 2 is being executed. In the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 whose display mode is a white square is displayed on the left side of the second area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910, and the display position is fixed without moving. The display size is gradually enlarged while rotating around the center of rotation. FIG. 16(l) shows that the special hold 2 animation 2 of the special map 2 ends and the special figure 2 hold icon 913 stops rotating to the left of the first region of the special drawing 2 pedestal 910. There is.

Further, in accordance with a change in the display of the hold increase animation 2 of the special figure 2 that is being executed, the visibility of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the special figure 1 variable game and the display such as the prefetch notice may be continuously changed. .. Further, the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 913 in the hold increase animation 2 of the special figure 2 has a higher display priority than the display of the decorative pattern change display or the prefetching notice, but the decoration pattern change display or the readahead notice is displayed. The display priority may be lower than the display of.

FIG. 16(m) shows the state after the end of the special figure 1 variation game. The special map 1 display device 212 displays the special map G (offset pattern) in a stopped state. Further, all the LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are turned off, and it is informed that the number of operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is 0. The 1st to 2nd LEDs from the left are lit up to inform that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holding in the special figure 2) is two.

In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 8-" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, indicating that the winning/deciding determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment "Decorative 1-decoration 9" is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 920, a blue fourth symbol (indicated by upward-sloping hatching in the figure) circular symbol for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. The special figure 2 hold icon 911 is displayed to the left of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 in the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is displayed to the left of the second area. Has been done. Further, since the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 0, the special figure 1 hold icon is not placed on the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The display modes of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 and the special figure 2 hold icon 913 are both white squares. Further, in the variable icon display area 800, a deletion animation of the variable icon 801 is being executed. For example, a mode in which the transparency (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the deletion animation. In FIG. 16(m), the variable icon 801 is deleted in the default mode.

Further, in FIG. 16(m), the stop display of the decorative symbol has a higher display priority than the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 913, but the display priority is higher than the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 913. May be lower. Further, the stop display of the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 or the special figure 2 pedestal 910, but is higher than the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 or the special figure 2 pedestal 910. Also, the display priority may be low.

FIG. 16(n) shows that the suspension of special figure 2 has been exhausted and the special figure 2 variation game has started. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 920. It is running. Further, the second LED from the left of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is turned off, and the fact that the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is decreased by 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 becomes 1 is notified. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that the hold of special figure 2 has decreased almost at the same time as the start of the special figure 2 variation game.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation is reduced by one and the special figure 2 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 800 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the vicinity of the special figure 1 hold icon display area and the special figure 2 hold icon are displayed. In the display area, a moving animation between the holding and changing icons of Toku-zu 2 is executed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area, a moving animation of the special figure 2 hold icon is executed. In the animation for moving between the hold and change icons of special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 displayed to the left of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 becomes the change icon 811 whose display mode is a white square. Then, the special icon 2 hold icon display area is moved to the variable icon display area 800 passing above the special figure 1 hold icon display area. FIG. 16( n) shows a state in which the variation icon 811 is located above the third region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900.

In addition, based on the fact that the number of holdings of the special map 1 is 0 at the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually descends vertically from the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Execution of an evacuation animation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation”) is started.

FIG. 16(o) shows a state in which during the special figure 2 variation game, the movement animation between the holding and changing icons of the special figure 2, the movement animation of the special figure 2 holding icon and the special figure 1 pedestal retreat animation are continuing. ing. In the animation for moving between the holding and changing icons of special figure 2, the changing icon 811 has been moved to a position above the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. In the moving animation of the special figure 2 holding icon, the special figure 2 holding icon 913 is displayed moving from the left side of the second area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 to the left side of the first area. Further, in the special figure 1 pedestal retreat animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered, and a display is made such that the lower half is retracted outside the special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the fourth symbol display area 920, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed.

In FIG. 16(p), the special figure 2 variable game is continuing, and the movement animation between the holding/changing icon and the special figure 2 holding icon of the special figure 2 is finished, It shows a state in which the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one during execution. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold of the special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1. Further, in the fourth symbol display area 920, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In the moving animation between the holding and changing icons of special figure 2, the changing icon 811 has completed moving into the changing icon display area 800. In the movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 has completed moving from the left side of the second area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 to the left side of the first area. Due to the fact that the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation is stopped while the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation is being executed, the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation is canceled and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Execution of an animation that vertically rises to a predetermined position and returns (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special figure 1 pedestal return animation”) is started. Further, the execution of the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 is started based on the increase of the hold of the special figure 1.

FIGS. 16(q) to 17(b) show that the special figure 2 variation game is continuing, and the state from the start to the end of the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and special figure 1 hold increase animation 1 Shows. In the fourth symbol display area 920, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. FIG. 16(q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the special hold increase animation 1 of special figure 1 are started. In the special figure 1 pedestal return animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually rises, and more than half of it appears in the special figure 1 reserved icon display area. In the increase animation 1 of special figure 1 hold, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 rises from below the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900 to the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. It is displayed that it is passing through the front. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 gradually increases the display size. FIG. 16(r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the special hold increase animation 1 of special figure 1 are continuing. In the special figure 1 pedestal restoration animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further raised, and the entire figure appears in the special figure 1 reserved icon display area. In the increase animation 1 of special figure 1 hold, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 further rises together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900, and the upper half of the circle is located above the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Display is made. In this embodiment, the movement speed of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 of the special increase animation 1 of special figure 1 is faster than the moving speed of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 of the special figure 1 pedestal return animation. It is not limited to. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 further expands the display size. FIG. 17A shows a state in which the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the pending increase animation 1 of special figure 1 are continuing. In the special figure 1 pedestal return animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further raised. In the hold increase animation 1 of special figure 1, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 further rises together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900, and almost all is displayed above the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Has been done. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 further expands the display size. FIG. 17B shows a state in which the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the pending increase animation 1 of special figure 1 are finished. The special figure 1 pedestal return animation is finished, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 is finished, and the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is displayed above the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900.

FIG. 17C shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 during execution of the special figure 2 variation game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 1 to 2. Further, in the fourth symbol display area 920, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. When the number of holdings of special figure 1 increases, execution of the holding increase animation 2 of special figure 1 is started.

17(d) to (h) show that the special figure 2 variation game is continuing and the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 1 is started and ended. In this state, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area while the whole is visible. 17D to 17G show a state in which the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 1 is being executed. In the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 1, the special figure 1 hold icon 905 whose display mode is a white circle gradually increases in display size and rises vertically from below the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. The display is made. In FIG. 17(h), the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 1 is finished and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is stopped above the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900.

16(q) to FIG. 17(b), the hold increase animation 1 of Toku-zu 1 is executed together with the Toku-zu 1 pedestal return animation, and thus is affected by the Toku-zu 1 pedestal return animation. On the other hand, the hold increase animation 2 of the special figure 1 in FIGS. 17D to 17H is executed independently, and therefore is not affected by other displays such as the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Therefore, for example, when the moving speed of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation increases, the moving speed of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 in the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 also rises, and the special figure 1 hold icon. The movement speed of 903 may be faster than the movement speed of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 in the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 1. Similarly, when the movement speed of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation decreases, the movement speed of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 in the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 also decreases, and the special figure 1 hold icon 903. There is a case where the moving speed of the special figure 1 holding icon 905 in the holding increase animation 2 of the special figure 1 becomes slower. In this way, since the moving speed of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 in the special hold increase animation 1 of special figure 1 changes, the time required from the start to the end of the special hold 1 animation 1 of special figure 1 (execution required time ) May also fluctuate. Therefore, the time required to execute the hold increasing animation 1 of the special figure 1 may be longer or shorter than the time required to execute the hold increasing animation 2 of the special figure 1. If the second display is an animation display and the display position changes during the animation display, if the second display is displayed during the first display and the first display is not displayed. You may make it move differently from the case where the second display is displayed. The operation in this case includes acceleration due to movement in the same direction, deceleration due to movement in opposite directions, change in movement direction due to movement in different directions, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the special figure 2 pedestal 910 as the first display in the first display mode and the special display as the second display. The display of the hold icon 911 in FIG. 2 can be displayed in the second display mode. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal moving animation is gradually descending from the upper right side of the image display area. The second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 in the hold increase animation 1 is gradually descending from the upper right side of the image display area. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 as the display means displays the special figure 2 pedestal 910 as the first display in the third display mode different from the first display mode, and It is possible to display the special figure 2 hold icon 913 as a display in a fourth display mode different from the second display mode. The third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In the fourth display mode, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is displayed on the left side of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 in the hold increase animation 2 of the special figure 2, and the display position is fixed without moving and the center is set as the rotation axis. It is a rotating display mode.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, so that the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since it is possible to infer the display mode of the first display from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means can display the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode. The first display is an animation that keeps the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation 910 stopped at a predetermined position after the end of the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation (hereinafter, "special figure 2 pedestal stop"). (Hereinafter referred to as “animation”) (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2 pedestal animation”). The first display mode is a display mode of the special figure 2 pedestal in the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation. The second display is an animation that maintains the state in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is stopped at a predetermined position after the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 and the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 are finished. This is an animation combined with the special figure 2 hold icon stop animation 1" (hereinafter, "special figure 2 hold animation 1". The second display mode is the special figure in the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the special figure 2 pedestal animation as the first display in the third display mode different from the first display mode. When being displayed, the special figure 2 hold animation 1 as the second display can be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the second display mode. 2 is a display mode of the special figure 2 pedestal in the two-pedestal stop animation.The fourth display mode is a display mode of the special figure 2 hold icon in the special figure 2 hold icon stop animation 1. The animation is It is a concept that includes not only the state where the image display is moving but also the state where it is stopped.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 208 as the display means displays the special figure 1 pedestal 900 as the first display in the first display mode and the special display as the second display. The display of the hold icon 903 in FIG. 1 can be displayed in the second display mode. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is vertically raised to a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation. The second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 hold icon 903 in the special increase animation 1 of special figure 1 is rising from below the special figure 1 pedestal 900 together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation. Is. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the third display mode different from the first display mode, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 as the second display. Can be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the second display mode. The third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The fourth display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 hold icon 905 in the hold increase animation 2 of special figure 1 rises from below the special figure 1 pedestal 900 separately from the special figure 1 pedestal 900.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the special figure 2 pedestal 910 as the first display in the first display mode, and the third display as the third display. The display of the fourth symbol in the four symbol display area 920 can be displayed in the fifth display mode. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is vertically raised to a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation. The fifth display mode is a display mode in which the fourth symbol is variably displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the special symbol 2 pedestal 910 as the first display in the third display mode, and the fourth symbol display as the third display. The display of the fourth symbol in the area 920 can be displayed in the fifth display mode. The third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. The fifth display mode is a display mode in which the fourth symbol is variably displayed.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, by making it possible to display the third display that is not affected by the first display, the first display and the third display can be compared with the third display. In some cases, the player can be focused on the second display. In addition, by making it possible to display the third display that is not affected by other displays, it may be possible to reliably transmit the information regarding the profit such as the lottery result to the player.

In this embodiment, the amount of change from the first display mode to the third display mode is the first change amount. The first display mode is the position where the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is first displayed after the start of the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation. The third display mode is the display position of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 at the end of the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation. The first amount of change is the movement distance of the first region of the special figure 2 pedestal 910. The amount of change from the second display mode to the fourth display mode is the second amount of change. The second display mode is the position where the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is first displayed after the start of the hold increasing animation 1 of the special figure 2. The fourth display mode is the display position of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 at the end of the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2. The second amount of change is the movement distance of the special figure 2 hold icon 911. Further, the first change amount is the same change amount as the second change amount.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the amount of change from the first display mode of the first display to the third display mode and the second display mode of the second display to the fourth display mode. By making the change amounts of the same, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the entire change of the display displayed on the display means, and it may be possible to make the player pay more attention to the display means.

In this embodiment, a part of the display of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 as the first display displayed in the first display mode is a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 as the second display in the second display mode. When the display of is displayed, the visibility becomes low. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is vertically raised to a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation. In the second display mode, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 in the special figure 1 hold increase animation 1 and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation are displayed from below the special figure 1 pedestal 900 to the special figure 1 pedestal 900. In this display mode, the display area is rising by passing through the front surface of the first area.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second display may be displayed on the first display so that the player can focus on the second display rather than the first display. is there. By reducing the visibility of at least a part of the first display, it may be possible to cause the player to be interested in the part and to pay attention to the first display and the second display.

In this embodiment, the special figure 2 pedestal animation display as the first display is a display including the special figure 2 pedestal animation display as the first animation display. Further, the display of the special figure 2 hold animation 1 as the second display is a display including the special figure 2 hold animation 1 as the second animation display. The special figure 2 pedestal animation display and the special figure 2 hold animation 1 display are different animation displays. The decorative pattern display device 208 as the display means can continuously display the special figure 2 pedestal animation display even when the display mode of the special figure 2 pedestal animation is switched from the first display mode to the third display mode. is there. The first display mode is a special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, and the third display mode is a special figure 2 pedestal stop animation. Further, the display means can continuously display the special figure 2 hold animation 1 display even when the display mode of the special figure 2 hold animation 1 is switched from the second display mode to the fourth display mode. The second display mode is the hold increase animation 1 of special figure 2, and the fourth display mode is the special figure 2 hold icon stop animation 1.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even when the display mode of the first display and the second display is switched, even if the display mode is different by continuing the display of each animation. In some cases, it may be possible to inform the player that the display is the same and not different.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the special figure 2 pedestal 910 as the first display in the first display mode and the special display as the second display. The display of the hold icon 911 in FIG. 2 is not displayed in the fourth display mode. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal moving animation is gradually descending from the upper right side of the image display area. In the fourth display mode, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is displayed on the left side of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 in the hold increase animation 2 of the special figure 2, and the display position is fixed without moving and the center is set as the rotation axis. It is a rotating display mode. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the special figure 2 hold icon 913 as the second display when the special figure 2 pedestal 910 as the first display is displayed in the third display mode. Is not displayed in the second display mode. The third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. The second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 gradually descends from the upper right side of the image display area in the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient. In addition, by limiting the display period of the first display, the period in which the player should pay attention to the first display is limited, so that it is possible to entertain the game without unnecessarily exhausting the player. There is.

(Example 2)
FIG. 18 shows an example of effect display in Example 2 of the present embodiment. 18(a) to 18(n) show the effect display state at each time point in this order in time series. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 18A to 18N is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment, and since the same operation and effect are exhibited, the same reference numerals are given to them. The description is omitted.

18(a) to (n), the decorative symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable icon display area 800, the special icon 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area. Arrangement of 920 and the like, variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, variable icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth symbol, etc. are as shown in FIG. 16(a). Since they are the same, their explanation is omitted.

FIG. 18A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. Toku-zu 1 display device 212
Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed, and the special figure d (outlier pattern) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 has been informed that the number of the operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is one, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 shows the operation of the special figure 2 It is reported that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2) is 0.

Background animation is displayed (first display) as a background effect over the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The background animation of this example is displayed in a first display mode in which a background image including an image of two samurai sitting is drawn over the entire image display area in the period of FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b). To be done. The background animation is displayed with the lowest display priority in the first display mode. In the background animation, the background image is reduced and displayed in the image display area in the period including FIGS. 18C to 18F after the display in the first display mode, and the background image is further moved to the left. It is displayed in the third display mode.

The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 920. The special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in a default display mode of a white circle. In the variable icon display area 800, the variable icon 700 for the special figure 1 variable game is displayed. The display mode of the variable icon 700 is a white circle.

FIG. 18B is an image simulating a pine bonsai tree (hereinafter referred to as “bonsai”) while the special game 1 variation game is being executed and the background animation is being executed in the first display mode. In some cases, a bonsai animation display (second display) using 922 is being executed. In FIG. 18B, the bonsai animation is displayed in the second display mode in which the bonsai 922 descends from above in front of the background image. The bonsai 922 gives advance notice of the result of the special map 1 variation game.

FIG. 18C shows that the special game 1 variation game is being executed, the background animation is displayed in the third display mode, and the bonsai animation is displayed in the fourth display mode. In the third display mode, the background image of the background animation is reduced and displayed. The reduced display of the background image is a notice for the change. With the reduced display of the background image, the display areas of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are also reduced. Therefore, another left middle right symbol display area 208a' to 208c' is provided in the upper right corner of the image display area, and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed at two places. Further, the arrangement of the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area 920, etc., the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols in the predetermined display area, the variable icon 700, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 , The hold icon 901, the display of the fourth symbol, etc. are displayed in the original size at the original position without interlocking with the reduced display of the background image. In the area other than the background image in the image display area, for example, a solid color filled image is displayed. In the fourth display mode, the bonsai tree 922 is reduced and displayed along with the reduced display of the background image.

FIG. 18D is a state in which the special game 1 variation game is being executed, the display in the third display mode of the background animation is continued, and the display in the fourth display mode of the bonsai animation is continued. Is shown. In the third display mode, the background image is further reduced and the background image moves to the left. An image of another effect is displayed on the right side of the background image. In the fourth display mode, the bonsai tree 922 is further reduced and displayed along with the further reduced display of the background image, and moves leftward together with the background image. Thus, while displaying the notice by the bonsai 922, the notice by the reduced display of the background image is also displayed. The display contents of both of these two notices will continue to be updated.

In addition, FIG. 18(d) shows a state in which the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 1 to 2. Based on the increase in the hold of Toku-zu 1, the execution of the hold increase animation of Toku-zu 1 is started, and the Toku-zu 1 hold icon 905 starts to rise from below the second region of the Toku-zu 1 pedestal 900. .. Note that the hold increase animation accompanying the start winning is not affected by the advance notice due to the reduced display of the background image. Further, since the hold icon is a pre-reading notice, it can be said that the pre-reading notice is not affected by the notice due to the reduced display of the background image.

FIG. 18E is a state in which the special game 1 variation game is being executed, the display of the background animation in the third display mode is continued, and the display of the bonsai animation in the fourth display mode is continued. Is shown. In the third display mode, the background image is further reduced and the image display area is moved to the left. On the right side of the background image, the entire animation image of another effect is displayed. In the fourth display mode, the bonsai tree 922 is further reduced and displayed along with the further reduced display of the background image, and the image display area is moved leftward together with the background image. Also, the hold increase animation of Toku-zu 1 is continuing. In addition, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in both the background animation and the animation of another effect.

FIG. 18F shows that the special game 1 variation game is being executed, and the display in the third display mode of the background animation and the display in the fourth display mode of the bonsai animation are finished. In the image display area, the display area for another effect that has moved from the right is enlarged so that the other effect is the center of the display. Also, the hold increase animation of Toku-zu 1 has ended.

18(g) to 18(l), the other effect is executed. The other effect is an effect that depicts a battle between two samurai, and gives a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. In FIG. 18(g), some kind of display may be performed in a region that is visible due to a change in display. The display may be a display regarding a game (for example, a display regarding a player's profit such as a lottery result), or may be a simple decoration unrelated to the game. In FIG. 18(h), another notice of the change is displayed after the notice is displayed by reducing the background image. The introduction part of the other notice is displayed during the display of the notice by reducing the background image, as shown in FIG. FIG. 18(m) shows a state where "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 18(n) shows a state in which "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and the big hit is confirmed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

(Example 3)
FIG. 19 shows an example of effect display in Example 3 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 19A to 19I show the effect display state at each time point in this order in time series. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 19A to 19I is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment, and since the same operation and effect are exhibited, the same reference numerals are given to them. The description is omitted.

19(a) to (i), the decorative symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area Arrangement of 920 and the like, variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, variable icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth symbol, etc. are as shown in FIG. 16(a). Since they are the same, their explanation is omitted.

FIG. 19A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The special figure 1 display device 212 executes the variable display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the special figure d (outlier pattern). Further, it is informed that the number of the operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is two in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the operation of the special figure 2 is in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. It is reported that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2) is 0.

The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c reduced in the upper right corner of the image display region, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display region 920. The special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 903 are displayed in the first and second areas of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in a default display mode of a white circle. In the variable icon display area 800, the variable icon 700 for the special figure 1 variable game is displayed. The display mode of the variable icon 700 is a white circle.

In the effect display area 208d, an image simulating a treasure box (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "treasure box") is displayed on the right hand as a first display, and an image related to a chance button (hereinafter, "button" is displayed on the left hand as a second display). The image is sometimes referred to as "image"). The button image is an image imitating a chance button in which the characters "CHANCE" are written on the pressing surface, a gauge image showing the operation valid period, an image of the character string "PUSH!" Is it a set of images with the character string "Are you going?". The display of the button image is also used as an operation promotion display as a notice for the change.

The display (first display) of the treasure box is displayed in the first display mode showing the state in which the lid of the box is closed in the period of FIGS. 19(a) to (c). Further, the display of the button image (second display) is displayed in the second display mode in which the gauge image is changed according to the remaining operation valid period during the same period.

In FIG. 19C, an image simulating the chance button is changed to a pressed state based on the player pressing the chance button, and a gauge image showing the operation valid period and a character "PUSH!" The button image is displayed in the second display mode in which the image of the column and the image of the character string “What do you get?” disappear.

FIG. 19D shows a state in which a linearly cut image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “break”) is displayed in the center of the image display area as a display based on a button operation. There is. The presence or absence of the display of the break depends on the button operation by the player. The display of the break indicates the display start timing that affects other displays.

FIG. 19E shows a state in which the left and right images are displayed in such a manner that the left and right images are gradually shifted from the cut portion. The display of the treasure box is displayed in the third display mode showing the state in which the lid is placed open. The button image is displayed in the fourth display mode in which the button image itself is hidden.

19(f) and 19(g), an image of a state in which a family crest, which is usually a premier notice for confirming a big hit, jumps out of a treasure chest and is divided is displayed in an area divided left and right from the break, and This shows the state in which the advance notice regarding the fluctuation is continuously displayed. In addition, a state in which a new notice display is displayed on the divided and exposed rear surface is shown. The display on the back surface may be updated while the divided areas are moving left and right, and the effect on the back surface may proceed. 19(h) and 19(i) show a state in which a new notice display is continuously displayed. After this, through a confrontation super reach effect, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" and the big hit is confirmed.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

(Example 4)
FIG. 20 shows an example of effect display in Example 4 of the present embodiment. 20(a) to 20(j) show the effect display state at each time point in time series in this order. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 20A to 20J is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment, and since the same operation and effect are exhibited, the same reference numerals are given to them. The description is omitted.

20(a) to (j), the decorative symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable icon display area 800, the special icon 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area. Arrangement of 920 and the like, variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, variable icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth symbol, etc. are as shown in FIG. 16(a). Since they are the same, their explanation is omitted.

FIG. 20A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The special figure 1 display device 212 executes the variable display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the special figure d (outlier pattern). Further, it is informed that the number of the operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is two in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the operation of the special figure 2 is in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. It is reported that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2) is 0.

The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c reduced in the upper right corner of the image display region, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display region 920. The special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 903 are displayed in the first and second areas of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in a default display mode of a white circle. In the variable icon display area 800, the variable icon 700 for the special figure 1 variable game is displayed. The display mode of the variable icon 700 is a white circle.

In the effect display area 208d, an image simulating a treasure box (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "treasure box") is displayed on the right hand as a first display, and an image related to a chance button (hereinafter, "button" is displayed on the left hand as a second display). The image is sometimes referred to as "image"). The button image is an image imitating a chance button in which the characters "CHANCE" are written on the pressing surface, a gauge image showing the operation valid period, an image of the character string "PUSH!" Is it a set of images with the character string "Are you going?". The display of the button image is also used as an operation promotion display as a notice for the change.

The display (first display) of the treasure box is displayed in the first display mode showing a state in which the box lid is closed and placed in the period of FIGS. Further, the display of the button image (second display) is displayed in the second display mode in which the gauge image is changed according to the remaining operation valid period during the same period.

FIG. 20C shows a state in which jagged cut images (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “breaks”) are displayed above and below the central portion of the image display area during the operation valid period. As described above, during the operation valid period, when the display of the break that affects the display mode of the display regarding the operation valid period is started, the valid period display is continued, but the acceptance of the operation is stopped. Good. Further, the validity period display itself may be erased. Further, even if the player operates a button, the display based on the operation may not be performed.

FIG. 20D shows a state in which the left and right images are gradually moved to the left and right from the cut portion. While the display is divided, the button operation promotion display, the display indicating the remaining time of the effective period, and the like are continuously displayed.

FIG. 20E shows a state in which the display is divided into left and right from the cut portion and the left and right regions are further shifted left and right. Further, based on the player pressing the chance button, the image simulating the chance button is changed to the pressed state, and the gauge image showing the operation valid period, the image of the character string “PUSH!” prompting the pressing, and “ The button image is displayed in the second display mode in which the image of the character string "What do you get?" disappears. It should be noted that during the change of the display area, the display affected by the change of the display area may be started, or the change of the display area may be started during the display of the display affected by the change of the display area. .. Further, the display affected by the change may be started at the same time when the display area is changed.

FIG. 20(f) shows a state in which the display is divided into left and right from the cut portion, and the left and right regions are further shifted left and right. The display of the treasure box is displayed in the third display mode showing the state in which the lid is placed open. The button image is displayed in the fourth display mode in which the button image itself is hidden. In addition, a family crest is displayed as a new notice display on the divided and exposed rear surface.

FIGS. 20(g) and 20(h) show an image of a state in which a family crest, which is usually a premiere notice of a big hit confirmation, jumps out of a treasure box and is divided into regions divided left and right from the break. This shows a state where the notice display regarding the fluctuation is continuously displayed. In addition, a family crest is displayed as a new notice display on the divided and exposed rear surface. In this way, the display contents of the new display and the display terminated by the new display may be common. Further, at least a part of the display modes may be the same.

20(i) and 20(j) show a state in which a new notice display is continuously displayed. After this, through a confrontation super reach effect, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" and the big hit is confirmed.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

(Example 5)
21 and 22 show an example of effect display in Example 5 of the present embodiment. 21(a) to 21(l) and 22(a) to 22(f) show the effect display state at each time point in this order in time series. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 21A to 21 and 22A to 22F is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment, and the same operation and effect are obtained. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to them and the description thereof will be omitted.

21(a) to (l) and 22(a) to (f), the decorative symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable icon display area 800, and the special figure 1 Arrangement of the hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area 920, and the like, the variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, the variable icon 700, the special figure 1 pedestal 900, the hold icon 9
01, the display of the fourth symbol and the like are the same as those shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, an effect display by image display using so-called shake vision will be described. In shake vision, image display in a non-shake state and image display in a shake state can be executed. The non-shaking state is, for example, a state in which a plurality of images are displayed inside a normal rectangular (or square) display area in the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The shake state is a state in which a plurality of images inside are also transformed and displayed in accordance with transforming the rectangular (or square) display region in the non-shake state into a diamond (or trapezoid) display region. For example, if one of the plurality of images displayed in the rectangular (or square) display area in the non-shaking state is a rectangle (hereinafter, referred to as “rectangular image”), the rectangular image in the shaking state. If the interior angle of the vertex of the rectangle closest to a certain vertex of is less than 90 degrees, at least the interior angle of the certain vertex is transformed so as to be less than 90 degrees. When the interior angle of the vertex of the rectangle closest to the vertex is greater than 90 degrees, at least the interior angle of the certain vertex is also deformed to be greater than 90 degrees. It should be noted that when one of the plurality of images displayed inside the rectangular (or square) display area is a general figure other than a rectangle such as a triangle or a circle, the image is similarly transformed.

FIG. 21(a) shows the state after the end of the special figure 1 variation game. The special map 1 display device 212 displays the special map G (offset pattern) in a stopped state. Further, the special figure 2 display device 214 is stopped and displayed the special figure d (departure pattern). Further, it is informed that the number of the operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is two in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the operation of the special figure 2 is in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. It is reported that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2) is 0.

In FIG. 21A, the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in a non-shaking state. A plurality of images (second display) are displayed inside a frame display (first display) that defines an image display area on the display screen. In the second display of this example, the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable icon display area 800, the variable icon 700, the special figure 1 pedestal 900, the special figure 1 hold icon Each display is included. The variable display and the stop display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 920 are not included in the second display. The frame display that defines the image display area is displayed as a rectangular frame having the entire display screen inside as a display mode in the non-shaking state (first display mode). In addition, the display of the plurality of images inside the frame is displayed in a non-deformed normal shape as the display mode (second display mode) in the non-shaking state.

In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination "decoration 8-decoration 0-decoration 2" indicating that the winning/decision result of the special game 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol display In the area 920, the fourth symbol in the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed in a white circular display mode. In the variable icon display area 800, a deletion animation of the variable icon 700 is executed.

FIG. 21B shows the state immediately after the suspension of special figure 1 is digested during the display in the non-shake state and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 920. It is running. The variation display of the decorative symbol is started from the left symbol display area 208a, then the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c in this order. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 has become 1. The special lamp 1 218 has a special lamp 1
The fact that the number of holdings is decreased is notified almost at the same time as the start of the special game 1 variation game.

In addition, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, between the hold and variation icons. Is executed, and in the special icon 1 hold icon display area, the move animation of the hold icon is executed. In the moving animation between the hold/variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is changed to the change icon 801 and moved to the change icon display area 800. The display mode of the variation icon 801 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 displayed above the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is moved above the first area. The display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901.

FIG. 21C shows a state in which the non-shaking state is changed to the shaking state. The frame display that defines the image display area is displayed in a rhombus shape on the display screen as a display mode (third display mode) in the shake state. The outside of the diamond-shaped frame in the display screen is displayed in black. Further, the display of the plurality of images inside the frame is changed and displayed according to the deformation of the frame display as the display mode in the shake state (fourth display mode). Specifically, the frame display that defines the image display area is displayed by the shake display so that the left side is deeper than the right side. The frame display that defines the image display area is affected by the change to the shake display, and the second display, for example, the special icon 1 hold icon 903 is changed so that the left side is deeper than the right side. Has been displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern that is changing, the changing icon 801, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 are also affected by the frame display that defines the image display area being changed to the shake display, so that the left side is deeper than the right side. Is displayed. In addition, a white square image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “hold icon number display”) showing the image of the number of hold icons of the special figure 1 inward is displayed at the upper left end of the image display area. Indicates that the number of the hold icons is 1. In addition, the low-speed decorative pattern immediately after the start of the special figure 1 variable display is deformed and displayed according to the deformation of the frame display, and the left side is deeper than the right side.

FIG. 21D shows the special figure 1 variation game being executed in the shake state. The frame display that defines the image display area is displayed in the third display mode in which the shake state is continued. The frame display is such that the right side is deeper than the left side. Due to the influence of the frame display being deformed, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 which is the second display is displayed in a shape such that the right side is deeper than the left side which is the fourth display mode. ing. Further, the changing decorative pattern, the changing icon 801, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 are also displayed such that the right side is deeper than the left side due to the influence of the deformation of the frame display. Further, even when the frame display is in the shake state and continues to be displayed, the moving animation between the hold/variable icons and the moving animation of the hold icon continue to be displayed.

FIG.21(e) has shown the state changed from the shake state to the non-shake state. The frame display that defines the image display area is displayed in a rectangular shape that fills the display screen as a display mode in the non-shaking state (first display mode). In addition, the display of the plurality of images inside the frame is a normal display without deformation as a display mode (second display mode) in the non-shaking state. For example, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is displayed in a normal circular shape. In this embodiment, the number of hold icons is not displayed in the non-shaking state, but it may be always displayed.

21(f) to 21(k) show that the special game 1 variation game is being executed, and the frame display that demarcates the image display area is the first display mode from the non-shake state to the third display mode. It shows the state where the shake state is continued after the state. In addition, the frame display that defines the image display area is displayed so that the right side is deeper than the left side by the shake display. A shape in which the frame display is changed to a shake display and the display of the special figure 1 hold icon 903, which is the second display, is deeper on the right side than on the left side which is the fourth display mode. Is displayed in. Further, the changing decorative pattern, the changing icon 801, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 are also displayed such that the right side is deeper than the left side under the influence of the frame display being deformed in the shake state. .. The area other than the frame display that defines the image display area is displayed in dark. In FIG. 21( f ), the number of hold icons is displayed at the upper left end of the display screen to show that the number of hold icons in Toku-zu 1 is 1. FIG. 21(g) shows a state in which the holding of special figure 1 is increased by one during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 1 to 2. The number of holding icons is displayed at the upper left end of the display screen, and it is shown that the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1 is two. The frame display that defines the image display area is kept in the shake display state that is the third display mode, and the frame display is such that the right side is further recessed than the left side due to the shake display. There is. The second display is also displayed in a shape such that the right side is deeper than the left side, which is the fourth display mode. In FIG. 21(h), the frame display that defines the image display area is kept in the shake display state which is the third display mode, and the frame display is further recessed in the right side than in the left side by the shake display. Is displayed. The second display is also displayed in a shape such that the right side is deeper than the left side, which is the fourth display mode. Further, the execution of the hold increase animation of the special map 1 is started based on the increase of the special map 1 hold, and the special map 1 hold icon 905 starts to rise from below the second region of the special map 1 pedestal 900. ing. FIG. 21I shows a state in which the frame display that defines the image display area continues the shake display state which is the third display mode. The second display also continues the shake display state which is the fourth display mode. Moreover, the hold increase animation of the special figure 1 is being executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is further raised and passes through the front surface of the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. The surface inside the outline of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is red (indicated by upward hatching in the figure), and a character image of "heat" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "heat") is displayed. Is visible. While the frame display is changed to the shake display, the special icon 1 hold icon 905 is displayed in a shape such that the right side is recessed more than the left side Is done. The display may be always performed. FIG. 21J shows a state in which the frame display that defines the image display area continues the shake display state which is the third display mode. The second display also continues the shake display state which is the fourth display mode. Further, the special figure 1 holding icon 905 is being executed, and the special figure 1 holding icon 905 is further raised and is being placed above the second region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. FIG. 21K shows a state where the frame display that defines the image display area continues the shake display state which is the third display mode. The second display also continues the shake display state which is the fourth display mode. The display of the special figure 1 hold icon 905, which is displayed as a look-ahead notice due to the effect that the frame display is changed to the shake display after the display of the hold increase animation of the special figure 1 ends, is displayed to the right. It is displayed in a shape that the one is recessed. Further, the execution of the hold increase animation of the special figure 1 is finished, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is further raised to be completely placed above the second region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. There is. Even during the shake display, the hold icon increase animation may be displayed such that the special figure 1 hold icon 905 appears from outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 may be displayed as if it has been cut out.

In FIG. 21(l), the special game 1 variation game is being executed, and the frame display that defines the image display area is changed from the shake display state which is the third display mode to the non-shake state which is the first display mode. The changed state is shown. The second display also shows a state in which the shake display state, which is the fourth display mode, is changed to the non-shake state, which is the second display state.

FIG. 22A shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 22A to 22F, the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the non-shake display (normal display) in which the frame display that defines the image display area is the first display mode is continued. Shows the state. Further, the second display also shows a state where the non-shaking state which is the second display state is continued. FIG. 22B shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 1 to 2. In FIG. 22C, execution of the hold increase animation of the special figure 1 is started based on the increase of the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is displayed from below the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Shows the state where is starting to rise. FIG. 22D shows a state in which the hold increase animation of Toku-zu 1 is being executed, and the Toku-zu 1-hold icon 905 is further raised and passes through the front surface of the second region of the Toku-zu 1 pedestal 900. ing. The surface inside the outline of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is red (indicated by upward hatching in the figure), and it is visible that "heat" is displayed. FIG. 22E shows a state in which the hold increase animation of special figure 1 is being executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is further raised and is being placed above the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Shows. In FIG. 22F, the execution of the hold increase animation of Toku-zu 1 is completed, and the Toku-zu 1 hold icon 905 further rises and is completely placed above the second region of the Toku-zu 1 pedestal 900. Shows the state.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

(Example 6)
FIG. 23 shows an example of effect display in Example 6 of the present embodiment. 23(a) to 23(m) show the effect display state at each time point in this order in time series. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 23(a) to 23(m) is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16(a) of the first embodiment, and since the same operation and effect are exhibited, the same reference numerals are given to them. The description is omitted.

Further, the decorative symbol display area, the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each of FIGS. Arrangement of 920 and the like, variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, variable icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth symbol, etc. are as shown in FIG. 16(a). Since they are the same, their explanation is omitted.

FIG. 23A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The special map 1 display device 212 displays the special map G (offset pattern) in a stopped state. Further, the special figure 2 display device 214 is stopped and displayed the special figure d (departure pattern). Further, it is informed that the number of the operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is two in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the operation of the special figure 2 is in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. It is reported that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2) is 0.

Background animation is displayed (first display) as a background effect over the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The background animation of this example is displayed in the first display mode in which the image of the white paper is drawn over the entire image display area in the period including FIGS. 23(a) to 23(d). The background animation is displayed with the lowest display priority in the first display mode. In addition, in the background animation, in the period including FIGS. 23(e) to (k) after the display in the first display mode, the white background paper is gradually turned from the lower left corner, and another animation is displayed on the exposed surface. It is displayed, and is displayed in a third display mode in which other images are hidden by the turned-up portion of the paper.

In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" indicating that the winning/decision result of the special game 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol display In the area 920, the fourth symbol in the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, in the variable icon display area 800, a deletion animation of the variable icon 700 is executed.

In the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed in a default display mode of a white circle. In addition, a character image "* This is an illegal prize error." (hereinafter may be referred to as "first error display") is displayed at the upper end of the image display area. Character image of Yoshimune, which has a signboard displaying the character image "Pull out the ball" as the second display on the front surface of the second region of the pedestal 900 (hereinafter referred to as "second It may be referred to as "error display") is displayed. The second error display is displayed in the second display mode in which the entire image is visually recognizable without being hidden by other images during the period including FIGS. 23(a) to 23(d). In addition, the second error display is a fourth display mode in which a part of the image is invisible due to the display in the third display mode of the background animation during the period including FIGS. 23(f) to (j). Is displayed. In FIG. 23A, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is placed above the second region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, but the second error display is different from the special figure 1 hold icon 903. Since the display priority is higher than the display of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 and the second region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 are invisible. Further, the display priority of the second error display is higher than that of the stop display of the decorative symbols, so that the lower half of the middle symbol display area 208b cannot be visually recognized due to the second error display.

FIG. 23(b) shows that the suspension of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 920. It is running. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 becomes 1. In the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the fact that the hold of special figure 1 has decreased is notified almost at the same time as the start of the special figure 1 variation game.

In addition, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, between the hold and variation icons. Is executed, and in the special icon 1 hold icon display area, the move animation of the hold icon is executed. In the movement animation between the holding and changing icons, the Toku-zu 1 holding icon 901 displayed above the first area of the Toku-zu 1 pedestal 900 becomes the changing icon 801 and moves to the changing icon display area 800. There is. The display mode of the variation icon 801 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the left half of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 moving from above the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 to above the first area is visible from behind Yoshimune. The display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901. In the fourth symbol display area 920, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed.

FIG. 23C shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the movement animation between the hold/variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are being executed. In the moving animation between the hold and variable icons, the variable icon 801 is further moved to the variable icon display area 800. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 further moves to above the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900.

FIG. 23(d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the movement animation between the hold/variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icon have ended. The moving animation between the hold/variable icons is completed, and the variable icon 801 has completed moving to the variable icon display area 800. The moving animation of the hold icon is completed, and the special figure 1 hold icon 903 has completed the upward movement of the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900.

FIG. 23E shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. Further, decoration symbol display areas (hereinafter, referred to as “reduced symbol display areas”) 208a′ to 208c′ in which the right middle left symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed are displayed on the upper right side of the image display area. The first error display is displayed in front of the right reduced symbol display area 208a'. Further, in the background animation, as the effect display of the special game 1 variation game, the white paper starts to turn over from the lower left corner, and the display in the third display mode is started. The second error display, which is the second display, is displayed in the second display mode in which the entire display is performed.

FIG. 23F shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, is being executed, and the effect that the paper is further turned from the lower left side of the image display area in the third display mode is performed, and one of the effects that is executed on the back side is performed. The part is visible. The second error display, which is the second display, is shown in the fourth display mode in which it is hidden by the flipped display of the paper under the influence of the background animation, which is the first display, and is partially invisible. The variable icon display area 800, the variable icon 801, the hold icon 903, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 are not affected by the background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, and are entirely displayed without being hidden by the turned-up display of the sheet. Has been done. The second error display is hidden in the flipped display of the paper under the influence of the background animation.

FIG. 23(g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, is being executed, and the effect that the paper is further turned from the lower left side of the image display area in the third display mode is performed, and It is visible. The visibility of the performance being performed on the back side is changing due to the flipping display of the paper. The second error display, which is the second display, is hidden by the flipped display of the paper under the influence of the background animation of the background display, which is the first display. ing. Further, the left middle symbol display areas 208a and 208b are almost entirely hidden by the turning-over display of the paper under the influence of the background animation of the background effect which is the first display. In addition, the first error display is not affected by the background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, and is entirely displayed without being hidden by the turned-up display of the sheet. When the production is done in the image display area where the special figure 1 fluctuation game is executed, that production may be displayed continuously.

FIG. 23(h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, is being executed, and the effect that the paper is further turned from the lower left side of the image display area in the third display mode is performed, and It is visible. The second error display, which is the second display, is hidden by the background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, and hidden in the flipped display of the paper. It's gone. Further, the right symbol display area 208c is half-hidden in the turned-up display of the paper under the influence of the background animation of the background effect which is the first display. Further, the left-middle-right reduced symbol display areas 208a' to 208c' are not affected by the background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, and are entirely displayed without being hidden by the turned-up display of the sheet.

FIG. 23(i) shows that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, is being executed, and the effect is that the effect of returning the turned-up sheet from the effect of turning the sheet in the third display mode is performed on the back side. The visible area of is gradually decreasing. The second error display, which is the second display, is hidden in the flipped display of the paper under the influence of the background animation of the background display, which is the first display. Is becoming Further, the right symbol display area 208c is entirely visible under the influence of the background animation of the background effect which is the first display. The first error display is not affected by the background animation of the background effect, and the entire image is displayed without being hidden by the turned-up display of the paper.The second error display shows the effect of the background animation of the background effect. It has been received and hidden in the flipped display of the paper. Not all of the displays are affected, and not all of the displays are affected, even if there are a plurality of displays having similar contents.

FIG. 23(j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, is being executed. The visible area of the production is gradually decreasing. The second error display, which is the second display, is shown in the fourth display mode in which it is hidden in the flipped display of the paper under the influence of the background animation of the background effect, which is the first display. The first display, which is the background animation of the background effect, is turned back to the original form, and the second error display is almost visible. Since the decorative pattern in the special figure 1 variable display is also influenced by the background animation, the reduced symbol display areas 208a' to 208c' which are not influenced by the background animation are displayed.

FIG. 23(k) shows a state in which "decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in each of the left middle symbol display area 208a and the left reduced symbol display area 208a' during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, is being executed, and the effect of returning the turned-up paper from the effect of turning the paper in the third display mode is further executed and executed on the back side. The production that is present is almost invisible. The background animation of the first display, which is the background animation, is displayed in the second display mode, which is a state in which the effect of returning the turned-up sheet is further executed and the second error display is entirely displayed. Are

FIG. 23(l) is a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the right middle symbol display area 208c while the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the reduced symbol display areas 208a' to 208c' are disappeared. Is shown. The background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, is displayed in the first display mode in a stationary state. The second error display, which is the second display, is displayed in the second display mode in which the entire second display is displayed.

FIG. 23(m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. The special map 1 display device 212 displays the special map G (offset pattern) in a stopped state. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on to notify that the number of operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holding of the special figure 1) is one.

In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 4-" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit indicating that the winning/decision result of the special game 1 variable game is out of alignment "Decorative 2 -decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 920, a blue fourth symbol (indicated by upward-sloping hatching in the figure) circular symbol for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, so that the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since it is possible to infer the display mode of the first display from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

(Example 7)
FIG. 24 shows an example of effect display in Example 7 of the present embodiment. 24A and 24B show the effect display state at each time point in a time series in this order. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b) is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16(a) of the first embodiment, and since the same operation and effect are exhibited, the same reference numerals are given to them. The description is omitted.

Further, the decorative symbol display area, the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each of FIGS. Arrangement of 920 and the like, variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, variable icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth symbol, etc. are as shown in FIG. 16(a). Since they are the same, description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 24(a), a character image "general zone" is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect on the front of the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and around the symbol display areas 208a to 208c and the special figure 1 hold icons 901 to 905. A state in which a red effect image is displayed as a prefetch notice is displayed. At the same time that the look-ahead notice effect in which the character image of "general zone" is displayed is started, an effect image such as a red aura is displayed in the image display area. The first effect display is the red effect image (indicated by hatching in the shape of a diagonal cross in the figure, and may be hereinafter referred to as "effect"). The effect display is displayed in the image display area. It is displayed in the first display mode which is the mode. Since the display of the effect is displayed in front of the variable icon 700, the portion of the variable icon 700 overlapping the display of the effect is visually recognized in red under the influence of the display of the effect. Further, since the character image "General Zone" (hereinafter, also referred to as "General Zone") as a prefetch notice is displayed in front of the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed. The circular lower part of ~905 is hidden in the "General Zone". Further, the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 920 is displayed in front of the effect display, so that the fourth symbol itself in the fourth symbol display area 920 is not visually recognized as red.

FIG. 24(b) shows a state in which a game ball has been won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the number of the special figure 1 holds increased from 3 to 4. A special figure 1 hold icon 907 (second display) is displayed above the fourth region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. The display of the hold icon 907 is displayed behind the effect display and overlaps with the effect display, so that the display of the hold icon 907 is visually recognized as if the display itself of the hold icon 907 is affected by the effect display. It is displayed in the second display mode. Further, it may be visually recognized as if the red hold icon 907 was displayed as the prefetching notice. The hold icon having a display mode similar to the display mode of the hold icon being affected by the display of the effect may be held in advance and may not be displayed. When it is possible to make the player playing the game for the first time illusion that a hot look-ahead notice has been given, even if he/she does not have a hold icon similar to the display mode of the hold icon being affected by the effect display. There is. Although not shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, a mode in which the effect display is not displayed in the image display area is the third display mode, and the display of the hold icon 907 indicates the effect display. The fourth display mode is a mode in which a white circle is displayed without being affected.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, so that the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since it is possible to infer the display mode of the first display from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

(Example 8)
FIG. 25 shows an example of effect display in Example 8 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 25(a) to 25(h) show the effect display state at each time point in this order in time series. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 25A to 25H is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment, and since the same operation and effect are exhibited, the same reference numerals are given to them. The description is omitted.

Further, the decorative symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each of FIGS. 25A to 25H, the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area. Arrangement of 920 and the like, variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, variable icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth symbol, etc. are as shown in FIG. 16(a). Since they are the same, description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 25A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The special figure 1 display device 212 executes the variable display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the special figure d (outlier pattern). In addition, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is one, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 operates of the special figure 2 It is reported that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2) is 0.

The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 920. The special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in a default display mode of a white circle. In the variable icon display area 800, the variable icon 700 for the special figure 1 variable game is displayed. The display mode of the variable icon 700 is a white circle. Hereinafter, the display of the circular contour image forming the special figure 1 hold icon 901 may be referred to as a first display, and the display of the content image displayed inside the circular contour may be referred to as a second display.

In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune”) is running with a sword from the lower right hand of the image display area toward the special figure 1 hold icon 901 (hereinafter, “hold”). An icon display mode changing animation" is displayed. The hold icon display mode change animation is an animation that can change the display mode of the hold icon.

25(b) to (h) show that the special figure 1 variation game is continuing and the hold icon display mode changing animation is continuing. FIG. 25B shows a state in which Yoshimune running toward the special figure 1 hold icon 901 stops near the special figure 1 hold icon 901 and raises his sword. FIG. 25C shows a state in which Yoshimune is slashing the special figure 1 hold icon 901. FIG. 25D shows a first display mode in which the contour, which is the first display of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 cut by Yoshimune, is transformed from a circular shape to a vertically elongated elliptical shape. Is displayed. Even when the frame display as described in FIG. 21 is not displayed in the shake state, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 may be displayed in an elliptical shape. The display in which the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is deformed may be the same display as that shown in FIG. 21, or may be a display similar to the display that is not the same display. FIG. 25E shows a state in which the contour shape of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is further deformed into the horizontally long elliptical shape of the first display mode, and the contour is gradually thinned. Yoshimune is about to leave the sword from the Toku-zu 1 hold icon 901 and leave. In FIG. 25( f ), the surface inside the outline of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 changes to red (indicated by upward hatching in the figure), and the second display displays the character image “heat” (hereinafter, “heat”). In some cases, the display of "heat" may be displayed in the second display mode. In the first display mode, the contour display of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 of the first display maintains a horizontally long elliptical shape, and the shape of the "heat" display of the second display is the second shape. As a display mode, it is displayed in a horizontally long shape similar to the shape of the special figure 1 hold icon 901. FIG. 25G shows a first display mode in which the contour shape of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is returning from an ellipse to a circle. In accordance with the change in the contour shape of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 in the first display mode, the shape changes from the horizontally long shape to the normal shape in the second display mode of the "heat" display of the second display. I am doing it. In FIG. 25(h), after the lapse of a predetermined time, the contour shape, which is the first display of the special figure 1 hold icon 901, returns to a completely circular shape and becomes the third display mode. The "heat" shape is also completely changed to the normal "heat" shape in the fourth display mode.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

(Example 9)
FIG. 26 shows an example of effect display in Example 9 of the present embodiment. 26(a) to 26(n) show the effect display state at each point in time in this order. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 26A to 26H is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment, and since the same operation and effect are exhibited, the same reference numerals are given to them. The description is omitted.

26(a) to (n), the decorative symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area Arrangement of 920 and the like, variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, variable icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth symbol, etc. are as shown in FIG. 16(a). Since they are the same, their explanation is omitted.

FIG. 26A shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The special map 1 display device 212 displays the special map G (offset pattern) in a stopped state. Further, the special figure 2 display device 214 is stopped and displayed the special figure d (departure pattern). In addition, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is one, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 operates of the special figure 2 It is reported that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2) is 0.

In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 4" indicating that the hit/miss judgment result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol display In the area 920, the fourth symbol in the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in a default display mode of a white circle. Further, in the variable icon display area 800, a deletion animation of the variable icon 700 is executed.

FIG. 26(b) shows that the holding of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 920. It is running. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 has become 0. In the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the fact that the hold of special figure 1 has decreased is notified almost at the same time as the start of the special figure 1 variation game.

In addition, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, between the hold and variation icons. The moving animation of is executed. In the moving animation between the hold/variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 becomes the change icon 801 and moves to the change icon display area 800. FIG. 26B shows a state in which the variable icon 801 has completed the movement into the variable icon display area 800, and the movement animation between the hold and variable icons has ended. The display mode of the variation icon 801 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901.

FIG. 26C shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The special map 1 display device 212 displays the special map G (offset pattern) in a stopped state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 9" indicating that the winning/decision result of the special game 1 variation game is out of display is stopped. Then, in the fourth symbol display area 920, the fourth symbol in the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, in the variable icon display area 800, a deletion animation of the variable icon 801 is displayed. Further, at this time, since the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the next special figure variation game is not started and becomes a non-variable state even after the lapse of a predetermined stop display period. Further, based on the fact that the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0 at the start of the special figure 1 variation game, special figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually descends vertically from the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The special animation 1 pedestal evacuation animation is displayed.

FIG. 26D shows a state in which the special figure variation game is in a non-variable state, the erasing animation of the variation icon 801 is finished, and the special figure 1 pedestal retreat animation is being displayed. In the special figure 1 pedestal retreat animation, it is displayed that the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered, and the lower half of the pedestal is retracted outside the special figure 1 reserved icon display area. The display of the deletion animation of the change icon 801 is completed, and the change icon 801 displayed in the change icon display area 800 has been deleted.

FIG. 26(e) shows a state in which the game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 in a non-variable state of the special figure variation game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold of the special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1. Due to the fact that the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation is being displayed from 0 to 1, the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation is discontinued, and instead the special figure 1 pedestal return animation is displayed. To be done. Further, the display of the hold increase animation of the special map 1 is started based on the increase of the hold of the special map 1. The display (first display) of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation is a first display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually rises and appears in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 903 (second display) in the hold increase animation of the special figure 1 is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 while gradually increasing the display size of the special figure 1 hold icon 903. Is displayed in a second display mode that rises together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900, passes through the front surface of the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, and reaches above the first area. The display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is a white circle.

26(f) to (h) show that the special figure variation game is in the non-variable state, and the state from the display of the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the special figure increase pending animation to the end thereof. FIG. 26F shows a state where the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the special increase animation of special figure 1 are being displayed. In the special figure 1 pedestal return animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further raised, and the entire first special figure 1 pedestal 900 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the first display is performed. ing. In the hold increase animation of Toku-zu 1, the Toku-zu 1 hold icon 903 rises together with the Toku-zu 1 pedestal 900 while passing through the front surface of the first region of the Toku-zu 1 pedestal 900 while further increasing the display size. The second display is made in the second display mode. The upper half of the circular contour of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is located above the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. FIG. 26G shows a state in which the display of the special figure 1 pedestal return animation is finished and the hold increase animation of special figure 1 is being displayed. The first display is made in the first display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the hold increase animation of Toku-zu 1, the Toku-zu 1 hold icon 903 further expands the display size, and the upper 2/3 of the circular outline is located above the first region of the Toku-zu 1 pedestal 900. The second display is made in the second display mode. FIG. 26(h) shows a state in which the display of the hold increase animation of Toku-zu 1 is finished following the display of the Toku-zu 1 pedestal return animation. After the display of the hold increase animation of the special figure 1 is finished, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is stopped at a predetermined position above the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, and the second display mode is adopted. Display is made.

FIG. 26(i) shows that the suspension of special figure 1 has been digested and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 920. It is running. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 has become 0. In the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the fact that the hold of special figure 1 has decreased is notified almost at the same time as the start of the special figure 1 variation game.

In addition, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, between the hold and variation icons. The moving animation of is executed. FIG. 26I shows a state in which the variable icon 803 has completed the movement into the variable icon display area 800, and the movement animation between the hold/variable icons has ended.

FIG. 26(j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. The special map 1 display device 212 displays the special map G (offset pattern) in a stopped state. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 informs that the number of operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holding of the special figure 1) is 0.

In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination "decoration 1-decoration 8-decoration 9" indicating that the hit/miss judgment result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol display In the area 920, the fourth symbol in the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the variable icon display area 800, a deletion animation of the variable icon 803 is being executed. Further, at this time, since the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the next special figure variation game is not started even after the lapse of a predetermined stop display period, and the state changes to a non-variable state.

FIG. 26K shows a state in which the display of the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation has started. Special figure 1 variation Based on the fact that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 0 at the start of the game, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually descends vertically from the special figure 1 hold icon display area and retreats. Teku Special Figure 1 The pedestal evacuation animation is displayed.

26(l) to (n) show that the special figure variation game is in a non-variable state, and the state from the time of displaying the special figure 1 pedestal retreat animation to the end thereof. FIG. 26(l) shows a state where the special figure 1 pedestal retreat animation is being displayed. In the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered, and the lower half of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is evacuated outside the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. FIG. 26(m) shows a state where the special figure 1 pedestal retreat animation is being displayed. In the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation, the first figure is displayed in the third display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered and almost all is evacuated outside the special figure 1 hold icon display area. FIG. 26(n) shows a state in which the display of the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation is completed. In the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation, the first display is made in the third display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered and the whole is completely evacuated outside the special figure 1 hold icon display area. .. Further, during the period in which the first display is displayed in the third display mode, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 as the second display is not displayed because the special figure 1 hold state is not held. Display mode).

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
At least one of the plurality of displays is a gaming table provided with at least display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, the display of the special figure 2 pedestal 910),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, display of special figure 2 hold icon 911, display of special figure 2 hold icon 913),
The display means may display the first display in at least a first display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is gradually descending from the upper right side of the image display area in the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation). It is a display means that can be displayed,
The display means can display at least the first display in a third display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area). Means,
The display means displays the second display in a second display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 in the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 gradually descends from the upper right side of the image display area. ) Is a display means capable of displaying at least,
The display means displays the second display in a fourth display mode (for example, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is displayed on the left side of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 in the hold increase animation 2 of the special figure 2 to display the display position. Display means capable of displaying at least in a display mode in which it is fixed without rotating and is rotating about its center as a rotation axis,
The first display mode is different from the third display mode (for example, the first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is descending from the upper right side of the image display area). Yes, the third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position),
The second display mode is different from the fourth display mode (for example, the second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 descends from the upper right side of the image display area. The fourth display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is fixed without moving from a predetermined position and is rotating around the center as a rotation axis).
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when displaying the first display in the first display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode. To do.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, so that the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since it is possible to infer the display mode of the first display from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.
In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a gaming table provided with at least display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a special figure 2 pedestal animation display),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, display of special figure 2 hold animation 1),
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display mode (for example, special figure 2 pedestal movement animation),
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a third display mode (for example, special figure 2 pedestal stop animation),
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a second display mode (for example, the hold increase animation 1 of special figure 2),
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a fourth display mode (for example, special figure 2 hold icon stop animation 1),
The first display mode is different from the third display mode (for example, the first display mode is a state display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is moving, and the third display mode). The mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 maintains a stop at a predetermined position),
The second display mode is different from the fourth display mode (for example, the second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is moved, and the fourth display mode is displayed). The mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is maintained stopped at a predetermined position),
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when displaying the first display in the first display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode. To do.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 920),
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in a fifth display mode (for example, a display mode in which the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 920 is variably displayed),
The display means displays the first display (for example, the display of the special figure 2 pedestal 910) in the first display mode (for example, in the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is located on the upper right side of the image display area). Display mode in which the display mode is gradually descending from, it is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode,
The display unit displays the first display in the third display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area). In this case, the display means is capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, by making it possible to display the third display that is not affected by the first display, the first display and the third display can be compared with the third display. In some cases, the player can be focused on the second display. In addition, by making it possible to display the third display that is not affected by other displays, it may be possible to reliably transmit the information regarding the profit such as the lottery result to the player.

(3) The pachinko machine 100 described above,
From the first display mode (for example, the position where the first region of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is first displayed after the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation is started) to the third display mode (for example, special figure 2 The amount of change (movement distance) to the display position of the first region of the pedestal 910 at the end of the pedestal movement animation is the first amount of change,
From the second display mode (for example, the position at which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is displayed on the display after the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 is started), the fourth display mode (for example, of the special figure 2 of FIG. The change amount (movement distance) to the special figure 2 hold icon 911 display position at the end of the hold increase animation 1 is the second change amount,
The first change amount is the same change amount as the second change amount (for example, the distance from the upper end side is equal).

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the amount of change from the first display mode of the first display to the third display mode and the second display mode of the second display to the fourth display mode. By making the change amounts of the same, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the entire change of the display displayed on the display means, and it may be possible to make the player pay more attention to the display means.

(4) The pachinko machine 100 described above,
The first display mode (for example, the display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is vertically raised to a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation) At least a part of one display (for example, the display of the special figure 1 pedestal 900) has a low visibility at least when the display means is in the first state,
The first state means that the second display mode is displayed on the display unit (for example, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 in the special increase animation 1 of special figure 1 along with the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation). The second display (for example, the display of the special figure 1 hold icon 903) is at least in a display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is elevated from below the special figure 1 pedestal 900 by passing through the front surface of the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. It is characterized in that it is displayed.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second display may be displayed on the first display so that the player can focus on the second display rather than the first display. is there. By reducing the visibility of at least a part of the first display, it may be possible to cause the player to be interested in the part and to pay attention to the first display and the second display.

(5) The pachinko machine 100 described above,
The first display (eg, display of special figure 2 pedestal animation) is a display including at least a first animation display (eg, display of special figure 2 pedestal animation),
The second display (for example, display of special figure 2 hold animation 1) is a display including at least a second animation display (for example, display of special figure 2 hold animation 1),
The first animation display is at least a different animation display than the second animation display,
When the display means switches the display mode of the first display from the first display mode (for example, special figure 2 pedestal movement animation) to the third display mode (for example, special figure 2 pedestal stop animation) Also, it is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the first animation display,
The display means changes the display mode of the second display from the second display mode (for example, the hold increase animation 1 of special figure 2) to the fourth display mode (for example, special figure 2 hold icon stop animation 1). It is characterized in that the display means is capable of displaying at least the second animation continuously even when switching to (1).

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even when the display mode of the first display and the second display is switched, even if the display mode is different by continuing the display of each animation. In some cases, it may be possible to inform the player that the display is the same and not different.

(6) The pachinko machine 100 described above,
The display means displays the first display (for example, the display of the special figure 2 pedestal 910) in the first display mode (for example, in the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is located on the upper right side of the image display area). When it is displayed in a display mode in which the display is gradually descending from the above, the second display (for example, display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911, display of the special figure 2 hold icon 913) is displayed as the fourth display. Aspect (for example, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is displayed on the left side of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 in the special hold increase animation 2 of the special figure 2, and the display position is fixed without moving and the center is rotated about the rotation axis. Display means) that does not display in
The display unit displays the first display in the third display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area). In this case, the second display is changed to the second display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is gradually descending from the upper right side of the image display area in the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2). It is characterized in that the display means does not display.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. Further, since the display mode of the first display can be inferred from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are being performed on the display means. In some cases, there is no need to pay attention to the display at only one place, which may be efficient. In addition, by limiting the display period of the first display, the period in which the player should pay attention to the first display is limited, so that it is possible to entertain the game without unnecessarily exhausting the player. There is.

Further, the plurality of displays having different display modes may include images generated from the same data. For example, the image data may be generated (developed in the VRAM) from the data stored in the image ROM. Further, the generated image data may be processed to perform the first display and the second display. Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode and the second display displayed in the third display mode may include image data generated from the same image data. .. Further, the image data may have different modes. By doing so, it is not necessary to have data for each different display mode, and in some cases, the limited capacity of the game table may not be pressed.

Also, the second display may consist of various displays. For example, the second display may consist of a hold icon. The second display may consist of a changing symbol display. The second display may consist of an error notification. The second display may be a notice display based on the lottery result of the change. The second display may be a look-ahead advance notice display based on the lottery result of the change after the change. The second display may be an operation promotion display (button press, ball removal, right hit, etc.) that prompts the player to operate the operation means. The second display may be a caution display (pre-paid card forgetting prevention notification) that calls the player's attention. By doing so, the display mode of the display related to the game may be changed or may not be changed, which may improve the interest of the game table.

The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
For example, for all the displays described in the above embodiment, there may be displays that are not affected by other displays. For example, the second display may be displayed while the first display is not displayed. In addition, when the second display is displayed while the first display is displayed, and when the second display is displayed while the first display is not displayed, the display position and shape of the second display, etc. May change. Further, the second display may be made up of a hold icon (an icon displayed in correspondence with the number of times the pattern variation display means has been operated once).

Further, there may be a case where another display that hides at least a part of either or both of the first display and the second display is displayed. Further, the display may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize either one or both of the first and second displays. Also, if the second display is an animation display and the display position changes during the animation display, if the second display is displayed during the first display, and the first display is not displayed. You may make it move differently from the case where the second display is displayed. Further, by displaying the second display first and displaying the first display during the second display, the second display is faded out of the screen while the new second display is displayed on the screen. May be faded in.

Further, in the case where the display mode of the second display is also changed along with the change of the display mode of the first display, the display mode may not be changed for the display that may cause a problem if the player misunderstands. Further, the alternative display may be newly performed while changing the display mode. For example, the mini variable symbol displayed in the upper right may be added to the variable symbol in the second embodiment. Further, the display mode of the display displayed based on the operation of the player (the display in which the player intentionally operates the operation means in order to see the display) may be changed by another display. For example, the display after pressing the button in the third embodiment (especially, a notice display of what is going out of the treasure box) may be changed.

Further, a premier notice may be displayed as a second display that is affected by the first display. Particularly, it is preferable that the second display is influenced by the first display and the display mode is changed so that the player can barely know whether or not the basic display content can be recognized. For example, it is preferable that a player skilled in the game can notice it, but an amateur cannot easily notice it. Further, a plurality of second displays affected by the first display may be displayed. That is, the display of the break is the first display, the display of the button image and the treasure box is the second display (1), the large family crest is the second display (2), and the second display (1) The visibility may be gradually reduced by the first display, but the visibility of the second display (No. 2) may be gradually increased by the first display. Further, the display contents of the second display (No. 1) and the second display (No. 2) may or may not be related.

In addition, a shake display may be performed as the first display. The shake expression freely transforms the display to give a sense of perspective. Also, as a plurality of second displays, when the first display is displayed while displaying a plurality of errors, one of the second displays is affected while the other second display is affected. May not be affected. Regarding the ball-out error that has a small disadvantage to the amusement store and the player (possibly giving a disadvantage or a disadvantage), the first display is affected, and while changing the display mode, the amusement store and the player With regard to the illegal prize winning error, which has a large disadvantage to, the display may be continued without being affected by the first display.

Further, there may be a case where the display has no display priority order. For example, before being affected by the first display, although the ball-out error display has a higher display priority than the hold display, only the ball-out error display is affected by the first display and the hold display May not be affected by the first display. Further, the display form of the second display is not limited to the above-described shape and position, and the appearance of the second display has the same appearance (similar to that of another display form not affected by the first display). It may be that it looks). In the above embodiment, a red hold icon may be displayed when the display is not affected by the first display, and the second display affected by the first display is the default (white) hold. If it is an icon, it looks similar to the red hold icon.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 39. Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, a configuration common to the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The description of the control system will be omitted.

FIG. 27A shows an example of a pre-reading notice lottery table used when performing the pre-reading notice lottery in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. The prefetch lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command including the prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and the display mode of the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the preread result by the preread notice lottery. Is determined. The pre-reading notice lottery table shown in FIG. 27(a) is composed of items of "pre-reading notice mode", "big hit", and "miss".

In the left column of the drawing, “pre-reading notice mode” indicates the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. "White" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a white circle, "Black" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a black circle, and "Heat" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is in a circle. It indicates that the character "heat" is drawn, and "white → black" indicates that the change animation (details described later) that changes the display mode of the hold icon from white circle to black circle is executed. , “Black→heat” indicates that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes from a black circle to a mode in which the character “heat” is drawn in a circle is executed. In the present embodiment, the default display mode of the hold icon is a white circle. When the pre-reading result includes undetermined information, the pre-reading notice lottery may not be executed and the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the pre-reading result may be displayed in the default display mode.

The “big hit” in the middle row in the figure is a prefetch lottery random number acquired from the prefetch lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the prefetch advance notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the prefetch result is a big hit. The distribution rate of the random number range of the pre-reading notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each pre-reading notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the distribution rate of each look-ahead notice mode when the look-ahead notice result is a big hit is "white" is 80%, "black" is 2%, and "heat" is 7%, “white→black” is 3%, and “black→heat” is 8%.

In the right column in the figure, “out” indicates a pre-reading random number acquired from the pre-reading random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the pre-reading notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the pre-reading result is out of alignment. The distribution rate of the random number range of the prefetching notice aspect to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetching notice aspect) is shown. As shown in FIG. 27A, the distribution rate of each look-ahead notice mode in the case where the look-ahead notice result is disappointing is "white" is 94%, "black" is 2%, and "heat" is 1%, “white→black” is 2%, and “black→heat” is 1%.

FIG. 27B shows an example of the advance notice lottery table at the start of fluctuation (after the big hit determination) used when performing the advance notice lottery in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Is shown. The advance notice lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and the advance notice lottery determines the form of the advance notice effect for the special figure variation game being executed. The lottery table for advance notice at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 27(b) is composed of respective items of “preliminary notice mode”, “big hit”, and “miss”. "Announcement mode" in the left column of the drawing indicates an advance mode executed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effectable movable body 990. "Logo drop" indicates that the notice is executed in a mode in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward, and "rotation" is executed in a mode in which the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates. "Drop logo + rotation" indicates that the effecting movable body 990 moves downward and the notice is executed in a manner in which the image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 rotates, and "none" indicates This indicates that the notice production is not executed.

The “big hit” in the middle row of the figure is the notice lottery random number acquired from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. The distribution rate of the random number range of the advance notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each advance notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 27( b ), the distribution rate of each notice mode when the notice result is a big hit is “logo drop” is 4%, “revolution” is 7%, and “logo fall+rotation”. Is 14% and “none” is 75%.

In the right column in the figure, “out” indicates the advance lottery random number obtained from the advance lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the advance notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of determination is false. The distribution rate of the random number range of the advance notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each advance notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 27( b ), the distribution ratio of each of the notice modes when the notice result is off is “logo fall” is 3%, “revolution” is 2%, and “logo fall+rotation”. Is 1% and “none” is 94%.

Further, the notice mode of "logo drop" may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. For example, the moving distance of the effect movable body 990 may be different depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or the moving speed of the effect movable body 990 is different. Further, the notice mode of "rotation" may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. For example, in the case of a big hit, the image is rotated once, and in the case of a big hit, the image is not rotated once and the rotation display is terminated and the normal display is restored. Note that the image may be rotated once even in the case of the deviation. Further, for example, the rotation angle of the image may be different, the angular velocity of the image rotation may be different, or the rotation direction of the image may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or a big hit. Images to be rotated may be different. Further, the notice mode of “logo drop+rotation” may be different as described above depending on whether it is a big hit or not.

(Example 1)
An example of effects of Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 28 and each drawing described later, an example of the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in each embodiment is shown in time series. In addition, the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a thick white arrow.

First, with reference to FIG. 28A, common points between FIG. 28 and each of the drawings described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 28A, in the upper left part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative frame f1 having a shape in which the letter “L” is vertically inverted is displayed. A square-shaped special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 is provided in the upper left portion of the decorative frame f1, and a square special figure 2 reserved number display area 932 is provided on the right side thereof, which is a special figure 1 reserved number display area. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 is provided below 931 and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934 is provided below it. In the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed by a number, and for example, “0” is displayed when the special figure 1 is not reserved. In the special figure 2 pending number display area 932, the number of pending figures of the special figure 2 is displayed by a numeral, and for example, “0” is displayed when the special figure 2 is not reserved. Further, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, when the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed as a variation display of the fourth symbol "/". , "\" images are displayed alternately, and the special figure 1 variation game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped and displayed), "-" or "○" as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" is the fourth symbol which is displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out, and "○" is the fourth symbol which is displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variation game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 1 variation game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, when the special figure 2 variation game is being executed, it is informed that the special figure 2 variation game is being executed as a variation display of the fourth symbol "/" , "\" images are displayed alternately, and the special figure 2 variation game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped and displayed), "-" or "○" as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of alignment, and "○" is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variation game.

Below the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a horizontally long rectangular decorative frame f2 is displayed. At the center of the decorative frame f2, a square variable icon display area 940 in which a part of the left and right frames are open is provided. The variable icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variable icon and the hold icon.

A special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is roughly divided into four areas from the left to the right, that is, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reservation orders of special figure 1, respectively. That is, the special area 1 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) special area 1 hold icon can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the special area 1 hold icon is displayed in the second to fourth areas. ~ The special figure 1 reservation icon corresponding to the reservation of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is roughly divided into four areas from the left to the right, that is, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the holding order of the first to fourth special maps 2, respectively. That is, in the first area, the special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the earliest (oldest stored) special figure 2 can be displayed, and similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon is displayed in the second to fourth areas. ~ The special figure 2 reservation icon corresponding to the reservation of the fourth special figure 2 can be displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960, various animations representing the movement of the hold icon are executed.

A square-shaped navigation character display area 970 is provided on the left of the special figure 1 reserved display area 950. In the navigation character display area 970, the character image h1 of the merchant is displayed. The character image h1 of the merchant is used for an explanation effect such as a tutorial effect, a notice (a notice of the change or a look-ahead notice), and the like.

To the right of the special figure 2 hold display area 960, a square effect custom state display area 980 is provided. In the effect custom state display area 980, "levels 1 to 99" are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 100. The level of the effect custom state is set to increase, for example, when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed. In addition, the level of the effect custom state may be set so as to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big hit is won.

FIG. 28A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the judgment result of the special game 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933, the 4th symbol of the display mode of "-" which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol in the display mode of "-" for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the reserved number of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

FIG. 28(b) shows that the holding of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 to notify that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 becomes 0.

In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 suspension icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the reservation/variation icon is displayed. The moving animation between is executed. In the animation for moving between the hold/variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. The rightward arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon 941 in FIG. 28B indicates the moving direction of the variation icon 941.

In FIG. 28C, “decoration 2” is provisionally stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold/variable icons ends, and the variable icon 941 is displayed in the variable icon display area 940. Is displayed. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and white is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. A default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 in FIG. 28B indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 952. Further, in FIG. 28C, a balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. .. The balloon image is an image used for advance notice by the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 28(d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of the increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 in FIG. 28D indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 953. In addition, an image of a character string of "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and an effect that expects to develop into a reach effect is executed. In addition, a substantially rectangular shape of the hold change image h2 including the image of the character string of "hold change" is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. .. The hold change image h2 is an image displayed for notifying that a pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the displayed hold icon or a changing icon or an effect of giving a notice of the change will be executed. In this example, the hold change image h2 is informed that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed changes. In addition, the hold change image h2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is changed. It may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is changed. The display may appear only when the hold icon and the variable icon of special figure 2 are changed, or may appear only when the hold icon of special figure 1, the hold icon of special figure 2, and the variable icon are changed. It may be a display.

FIG. 28(e) shows that "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Shows the state in which was notified. Further, an erasing animation in which the variability icon 941 displayed in the variability icon display area 940 moves downward is displayed, and the variability icon 941 is gradually erased. Further, FIG. 28E illustrates a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of lightning strike is displayed from the pending change image h2 to the special figure 1 hold icon 952, and an effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 951. The effect image is displayed in front of the special figure 1 hold icons 952 and 953, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon 952 and part of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are hidden by the effect image.

FIG. 28(f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the judgment result of the special game 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. Further, in FIG. 28F, the change animation ends, the hold change image h2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 28E are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. Is changing.

FIG. 28(g) shows that the first special figure 1 has been reserved and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, the special figure 1 hold icon 952 becomes a variable icon, and the moving animation between the hold/change icons and the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are started. ing. Further, in FIG. 28(g), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. ..

FIG. 28(h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold/variable icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 28(h), an image of a character string of "donor" is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the character image h1 of the merchant, which suggests that a character image h3 of the tongue, which will be described later, appears. The production is being executed. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27B (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 28(i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the character string "Called?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the character image h3 of the lord. Further, an image of a character string of "Den!" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 28(j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

In FIG. 28(k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “rotation target image” in this embodiment) are the image display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as seen from the player with the center of the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in FIG. 28K, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image rotated counterclockwise by 45° is the horizontal axis in the direction rotated 45° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and the vertical axis is the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. It is the aspect ratio of the case. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated after rotation is the aspect ratio when the horizontal axis is taken in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis is taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. .. For example, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image when the rotation target image is rotated 90° counterclockwise when viewed from the player is the rotation target image in a state where the rotation target image is rotated 90° clockwise when viewed from the player. It shows the ratio of the vertical length to the horizontal length. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed even during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

The rotation target image before rotation shown in FIG. 28(j) is displayed in an aspect ratio matched to the screen having an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), whereas The rotation target image shown in 28(k) is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7:5. Further, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, and a part of the navigation character display region 970 are displayed so that they can be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. It Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed even during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

FIG. 28(l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated 45° counterclockwise (a total of 90° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 28(k). Shows. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 1:1. Further, in FIG. 28(l), the rotation target image is not completely cut off and is displayed in its entirety.

FIG. 28(m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90° counterclockwise (a total of 180° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 28(l). Shows. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation.

FIG. 28(n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45° counterclockwise (rotated by 225° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 28(m). Shows. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7:5. Also, in FIG. 28(n), the pending change image h2 during the execution of the rotation display notice effect is the decoration symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c as the rotation target image, and the lord's character. It is displayed so as to overlap the image h3. The hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 28(n) is an image used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Further, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, and a part of the navigation character display region 970 are displayed so that they can be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. It

FIG. 28( o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45° counterclockwise (rotated 270° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 28( n). Showing. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1:1. Further, in FIG. 28(o), the rotation target image is not completely cut off. Also, FIG. 28( o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which a lightning strike occurs from the pending change image h2, and a lightning strikes the variable icon displayed in a black circle. The variable icon having a lightning strike overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. In addition, in FIG. 28(o), "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area of 950 appears by the increase animation of the hold icon.

FIG. 28(p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 28(o) (total 315° rotation). Showing. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7:5. In addition, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 28(o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon 941 are deleted, and the character "heat" is drawn in the circle. The fluctuation icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 28(q), the rotation target image is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation center from the state of FIG. 28(p) (total 360° rotation). , Shows the state in which the image to be rotated has rotated once and returned to the original display state. Also, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 28(r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. It shows a state in which it is notified. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed. The downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variable icon in FIG. 28( r) indicates the moving direction of the variable icon.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image may be used as the rotation target image, and the presence/absence of the character image may be increased by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, which may give a strong impression to the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image rotates once (360° rotation), but the rotation target image may rotate one rotation or more. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the rotation target image, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. To VRAM 436 may be used to generate a display image. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated by using a random number, and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. It may be done. Further, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change of the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, and the rotation target image may be displayed in a fixed area so that the rotation target image has a constant display area. The aspect ratio may change.

In the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation, but the rotation target image may have an arbitrary position of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Good. Further, the rotation target image may be rotated with a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. You may rotate as an axis. Further, in the present embodiment, the angular velocity of rotation of each image in the rotation target image is constant, but the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be changed according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be slowed as the distance from the rotation center increases. In this case, it may be possible to give the player the impression that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks. Further, in this embodiment, an effect of changing the variable icon is performed during the rotation display notice effect as a notice of the symbol change display being executed. Therefore, there are cases where expectations for the special figure variation game being executed can be synergistically increased by simultaneously performing these effects.

(Example 2)
An effect example of Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 29(a) to 29(r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. FIG. 29(a) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 28(a). Next, FIG. 29(b) shows the state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 28(b). Next, in FIG. 29C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 ends, and the variable icon display area 940 is displayed. The change icon 941 is displayed. Further, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, FIG. 29C shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. It shows the state.

FIG. 29D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, an image of the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 29E shows that "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates that the notification has been made. Next, FIG. 29(f) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 28(f). Next, FIG. 29(g) shows the same state as FIG. 28(g) showing the state in which the first special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. Next, FIG. 29(h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold/fluctuation icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 have ended, and is the same state as FIG. 28(h). Next, FIG. 29(i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the same as FIG. 28(i). Shows the state.

FIG. 29(j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

FIG. 29(k) is a decorative pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the pending change image h2, the character image h3 of the hall, the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f2. Images displayed inside (a hold icon, a variable icon, a merchant character image h1, etc.) and a balloon image representing the lines of the merchant character image h1 (hereinafter, referred to as "rotation target image" in the present embodiment. ) Indicates a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, different from the rotation display advance notice effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, the decoration frame f1 and the image displayed in the decoration frame f1 (holding number display, first Images of four patterns) (hereinafter, in the present embodiment, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images”) are not rotated and displayed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target images does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only a part of the non-rotation target images is displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

The rotation target image before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio matched to the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 29(k). The target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7:5. Further, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, and a part of the navigation character display region 970 are displayed so that they can be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. It Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed even during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

FIG. 29(l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45° counterclockwise (a total of 90° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 29(k). Showing. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 1:1. Further, in FIG. 29(l), the rotation target image is not overlooked and the entire image is displayed.

FIG. 29(m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90° counterclockwise (a total of 180° rotation) from the state of FIG. 29(l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Further, the decoration frame f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration frame f2. The decoration frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decoration frame f2, and the decoration frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decoration frame f2.

FIG. 29(n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45° counterclockwise (rotated 225° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 29(m). Showing. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7:5. Further, in FIG. 29(n), the pending change image h2 during the execution of the rotation display notice effect is the decoration pattern displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c as the rotation target image, and the character of the lord. It is displayed so as to overlap the image h3. The hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 29(n) is an image used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Further, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, and a part of the navigation character display region 970 are displayed so that they can be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. It

FIG. 29( o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45° counterclockwise (a total of 270° rotation) from the state of FIG. 29( n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Showing. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1:1. Further, in FIG. 29( o ), the rotation target image is not completely cut off. Further, FIG. 29( o) shows a state in which an effect for changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which a lightning strike occurs from the pending change image h2, and a lightning strikes the variable icon displayed in a black circle. The variable icon having a lightning strike overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. In addition, in FIG. 29(o), "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area of 950 appears by the increase animation of the hold icon.

FIG. 29( p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45° counterclockwise (a total of 315° rotation) from the state of FIG. 29( o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 as the center of rotation. Showing. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7:5. Also, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 29(o) and the effect image displayed by overlapping the entire variation icon are deleted, and the variation of the aspect in which the character "heat" is drawn in the circle The icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 29(q), the rotation target image rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 29(p) (360° rotation in total). , Shows the state in which the image to be rotated has rotated once and returned to the original display state. Also, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 29(r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. It shows a state in which it is notified. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, so that an elimination animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image does not rotate when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed. For the non-rotation target image, the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area and the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area are used. For this reason, the image that informs the player of important information is not rotated.

(Example 3)
An effect example of Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 30(a) to 30(r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. FIGS. 30A to 30H show the same states as FIGS. 29A to 29H. Next, in FIG. 30(i), the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the lower right part of the effect display area 208d. The lord's character image h3 and the decorative frame f2 are displayed in an overlapping manner, and a part (chin portion) of the lord's character image h3 is hidden by the decorative frame f2. Further, FIG. 30(i) shows the same state as FIG. 29(i) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall and the character image h3 of the hall is different. Next, FIG. 30(j) shows the same state as FIG. 29(j) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall and the character image h3 of the hall is different.

FIG. 30(k) is a balloon image representing the decorative pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character image h3, and the dialogue of the lord's character image h3 (hereinafter, these images will be referred to as " It may be referred to as a “rotation target image”.) indicates a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center as the rotation center. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment, the decoration frame f1, the image displayed in the decoration frame f1, the decoration frame f2, and the decoration frame f2 are displayed. The rotated image and the balloon image representing the speech of the old character (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target image” in this example) are not rotated and the non-rotation target image is displayed. Aspect ratio does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only a part of the non-rotation target images is displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

In FIG. 30(k), the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), while the rotation shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3:4. Also, in the character image h3 of the hall, the hidden chin portion is displayed. Further, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is cut off in the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, FIG. 30(l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 30(k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1:1. Next, FIG. 30(m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 90° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 30(l). Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, FIG. 30(n) shows a state in which the rotation target image has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. 30(m). The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen with the aspect ratio of 3:4. In addition, in FIG. 30(n), while the rotation display notice effect is being executed, the pending change image h2 is the rotation target image, the decorative pattern displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the lord. It is displayed so as to overlap the image h3. The hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 30(n) is an image used for a notice effect of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

FIG. 30( o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 30( n ). The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1:1. Further, FIG. 30( o) shows a state in which an effect (change animation of the variable icon) for changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect in this embodiment, the lightning generated from the pending change image h2 is displayed so as to fall at a position different from the change icon to be changed. In addition, the variation icon of the non-rotation target image changes from a black circle to a mode in which the character “heat” is drawn in a circle at the timing when the effect image is displayed due to thunder from the pending change image h2. ing. In this embodiment, since the changing icon that changes is not hidden by the effect image, the changed icon after changing can be visually recognized earlier than when the changing icon that changes is hidden by the effect image.

FIG. 30(p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 30(o). The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3:4. The pending change image h2, the lightning image, and the effect image are deleted. Next, FIG. 30(q) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 30(p) and returned to the original state. Showing. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image has returned to the original aspect ratio. Next, in FIG. 30(r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. It shows a state in which it is notified. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image does not rotate when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed. As the non-rotation target image, images such as the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area, the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area, the hold icon, and the change icon are used. For this reason, the image that informs the player of important information is not rotated.

(Example 4)
An effect example of Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 31(a) to 31(r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. FIGS. 31(a) to 31(i) show the same states as FIGS. 30(a) to 30(i).

FIG. 31(j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed. Further, FIG. 31(j) shows a decoration frame f2, an image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (holding icon, change icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1. It has been erased.

FIG. 31(k) is a balloon image (hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the pending change image h2, the hall character image h3, and the dialogue of the hall character image h3. "It may be referred to as a "rotation target image".) indicates a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by 45° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center as the rotation center. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, the decoration frame f1 and the image displayed in the decoration frame f1 (hereinafter, in this example, These images may be referred to as "non-rotation target images.") The rotation display is not executed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target images does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only a part of the non-rotation target images is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Further, in FIG. 31K, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the target image changes according to the aspect ratio of the screen having an aspect ratio of 3:4.

FIG. 31(l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45° counterclockwise (a total of 90° rotation) from the state of FIG. 31(k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Showing. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1:1. Next, in FIG. 31(m), the rotation target image is rotated 90° counterclockwise (a total of 180° rotation) from the state of FIG. 31(l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 as the center of rotation. It shows the state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern. Next, in FIG. 31(n), the rotation target image is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 31(m) (rotated 225° in total). It shows the state. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3:4. Further, in FIG. 31(n), the pending change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image during execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the pending change image h2g is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed so as to overlap the design and the character image h3 of the hall. The hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 31(n) is an image used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

FIG. 31( o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45° counterclockwise (rotated by 270° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 31( n). Shows. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1:1. Further, FIG. 31( o) shows a state in which an effect for changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. The effect is different from the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon during the rotation display notice effect in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present embodiment, and the lightning generated from the pending change image h2 is changed. It is displayed so as not to drop on the target change icon. In addition, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image is indicated by a circle in the position of the fluctuation icon display area 940 before the execution of the rotation display notice effect at the timing when the thunder is generated from the hold change image h2 and the effect image is displayed. The variation icon 942 in the form of the character “heat” is temporarily overlapped with the pending change image h2 and “decoration 3”, and is given priority over the pending change image h2 and “decoration 3” to the front side. It is displayed. Therefore, the player can temporarily confirm that the variable icon has changed.

FIG. 31(p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated 45° counterclockwise (a total of 315° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 31(o). Shows. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen with the aspect ratio of 3:4. Further, the pending change image h2, the lightning image, the effect image, and the change icon 941 are deleted. Next, in FIG. 31(q), the rotation target image is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 30(p) (total 360° rotation). It shows the state of returning to the original state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image has returned to the original aspect ratio. Further, the erased decorative frame f2, the image displayed in the decorative frame f2 (holding icon, variable icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 are displayed. There is. Next, in FIG. 31(r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It shows a state in which it is notified. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed, it is possible to prevent the display of images such as the hold icon and the variable icon, which are important information for the player. In some cases, the player may be allowed to pay attention to the rotation display of the rotation target image. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the effect of changing the variable icon is performed although the variable icon is not displayed. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise. In addition, it may be possible to satisfy the player's expectation by displaying only the variable icon that has temporarily changed during the effect of changing the variable icon. Further, the variable icon may be temporary or may not be displayed until the rotation display of the rotation target image is completed. In this case, it takes a certain amount of time from the end of the change icon change animation to the display of the change icon, which may increase the player's expectation. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, there may be a case where an effect of changing the hold icon is performed even though the hold icon is not displayed.

(Example 5)
An effect example of Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32(a) to 32(l) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. Further, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and the sixth to ninth embodiments described later has a sub display device 209 mounted on the production movable body 225. The effecting movable body 225 can be vertically moved and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). .. It should be noted that the production movable body 225 may be capable of moving three-dimensionally. Further, the sub display device 209 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub display device 209, the liquid crystal display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the sub display device 209 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400 similarly to the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

FIG. 32(a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the judgment result of the special game 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display aspect which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the reserved number of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 32A shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of and above the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 32A, the sub display device 209 (effect movable body 225) is located at the initial position.

FIG. 32(b) shows that the suspension of special figure 1 has been exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 to notify that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 suspension icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the reservation/variation icon is displayed. The moving animation between is executed. In the animation for moving between the hold/variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. As described above, in FIG. 32B, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is executed.

FIG. 32C illustrates a state in which the moving icon 941 is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 after the movement animation between the hold and variable icons is completed. Also, FIG. 32C shows a state in which the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. In this example, the character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27B (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 32D shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the character image h3 of the player is executed on the sub display device 209. FIG. 32D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 of the hall displayed on the sub display device 209 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target image” in the present example) has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. It shows a state in which it is rotated counterclockwise by 45°. Further, in FIG. 32D, the rotation target image is displayed with the aspect ratio of the image changed. The image to be rotated before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the sub display device 209), whereas the image to be rotated shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7:5. Next, FIG. 32E shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 32D (rotated by 90° in total). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio matched with the screen having the aspect ratio of 1:1. Next, FIG. 32F shows a state in which the image to be rotated is in the state of FIG. 32E or is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as a rotation center (a total rotation of 135°). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 7:5.

FIG. 32G shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 32F (rotated by 180° in total). ing. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, FIG. 32(h) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 32(g) (total 225° rotation). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 7:5. Next, FIG. 32(i) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° (rotated by 270° in total) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 32(h). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio matched with the screen having the aspect ratio of 1:1. Next, FIG. 32(j) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 32(e) (total 315° rotation). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 7:5. Next, FIG. 32(k) shows that the image to be rotated is rotated 45° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 32(j) (rotated 360° in total). It has returned to the state. Also, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 32(l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the sub display device 209, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. This indicates a state in which the fact is notified. Further, by moving the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

In this way, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated and displayed, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image is used as the rotation target image. By changing the aspect ratio of the character image, the presence of the character image may be enhanced, which may give an impact to the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect in the present embodiment, the image to be rotated is rotated once (360°), but it may be configured to rotate once or more. For example, the greater the number of rotations of the image to be rotated, the higher the jackpot reliability may be.

Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function having the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. A display image may be generated from the data using the work area of the VRAM 436. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a random number, and the display image is displayed using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. It may be generated. Further, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change of the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, and the rotation target image may be displayed in a fixed area so that the rotation target image has a constant display area. The aspect ratio may change.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of rotation of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation, but may have the rotation center at any position of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Good. The rotation target image may be rotated about a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position of the image display area of the sub display device 209. It may be rotated as a rotation axis.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angular velocity of rotation of the image to be rotated is constant, but the angular velocity of rotation of the image to be rotated may be changed according to the distance from the center of rotation. For example, the angular velocity of rotation of the rotation target image may be slowed as the distance from the rotation center increases. In this case, it may be possible to give the player the illusion that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks.

(Example 6)
An example of effects of Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIGS. 33(a) to 33(l) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 33A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the judgment result of the special game 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display aspect which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the reserved number of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 33A shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of and above the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 has a holding display area 209b for displaying the holding number display image in the lower left part. In FIG. 33A, in the hold display area 209b of the sub-display device 209, "1" indicating that the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed as the hold number display image.

FIG. 33(b) shows that the suspension of special figure 1 has been exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 to notify that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 has become 0. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 suspension icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the reservation/variation icon is displayed. The moving animation between is executed. In the animation for moving between the hold/variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. In this way, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is executed. Further, in the hold display area 209b at the lower left of the sub display device 209, "0" indicating that the hold number in the special figure 1 is 0 is displayed as the hold number display image.

FIG. 33C shows a state in which the moving icon between the holding and changing icons is finished and the changing icon 941 is displayed in the changing icon display area 940. Also, FIG. 33C shows a state in which the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27B (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 33(d) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 360° counterclockwise as seen from the player in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, the character image h3 of the lord is rotated 360° counterclockwise. FIG. 33D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 moves from the front position to the lower position of the center upper portion of the decorative pattern display device 208, and rotates 45° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. It shows the state of being. Further, the hold display area 209b in the lower left part of the sub display device 209 is moved to the upper left part of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 degrees clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. ° It is rotated and displayed.

FIG. 33E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 33D (a total rotation of 90°). Is shown. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 degrees clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed after being rotated by 90 degrees (total 90 degrees). Next, in FIG. 33(f), the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 33(e) (a total rotation of 135°). It shows the state of being done. Further, the hold display area 209b in the upper left part of the sub display device 209 is moved to the upper right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 135° rotation). Next, in FIG. 33(g), the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 33(f) (a total rotation of 180°). It shows the state of being done. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is rotated and displayed (180° in total).

FIG. 33(h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° (rotation of 225° in total) from the state of FIG. 33(g) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Is shown. Further, the hold display area 209b in the upper right part of the sub display device 209 is moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated by 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed by rotating (total of 225°). Next, in FIG. 33(i), the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display region of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 33(h) (total 270° rotation). It shows the state of being. Further, the “0” image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated by 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed (rotated 270° in total).

FIG. 33(j) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 33(i) (total 315° rotation). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 209b in the lower right part of the sub display device 209 is moved to the original position in the lower left part of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed after being rotated (total of 315° rotation). Next, in FIG. 33(k), the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 33(j) (total 360° rotation). It shows the state of being done. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 360° rotation). Next, in FIG. 33(l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. It shows a state in which it is notified. In addition, the sub-display device 209 erases the character image h3 of the hall, and the decorative pattern display device 208 moves the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward to erase the variation icon 941. Animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 209. When the sub display device 209 is rotated, the number-of-holds display image displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as seen from the player. Further, the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 209 as seen by the player, in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 209. Therefore, during the rotation of the sub display device 209, the number-of-holding display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 209, by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed, or a decorative symbol. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 209 simultaneously or continuously, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 209 may be immovably fixed to the game board 200.

(Example 7)
An effect example of Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. 34(a) to 34(l) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 34(a) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 32(a). Next, FIG. 34(b) shows the state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 32(b). Next, in FIG. 34(c), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the moving animation between the hold/variable icons ends, and the variable icon display region. The change icon 941 is displayed at 940. In addition, FIG. 34C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved downward and the character image h3 of the player is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27B (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 34(d) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 34D shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. The character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 209. The image is displayed rotated by 45° clockwise about the center of rotation. Therefore, the player's character image h3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Next, FIGS. 34E to 34K show a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 45°. In addition, in FIGS. 34E to 34K, the character image h3 of the user is displayed by being rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. Therefore, while the sub display device 209 is rotating, the player's character image h3 is always visually recognized as not rotating. Next, in FIG. 34(l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. It shows a state in which it is notified. In addition, the sub-display device 209 erases the character image h3 of the hall, and the decorative pattern display device 208 moves the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward to erase the variation icon 941. Animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction as the sub display device 209 while rotating the sub display device 209. , The character image is displayed in a state where it is not rotated when viewed from the player. Therefore, even though the sub display device 209 is rotating, the image displayed on the sub display device does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness. Further, in the present embodiment, the character image is rotated in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. The character image may be rotated at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 or at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. The character image may be rotated at different speeds.

(Example 8)
An effect example of Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 35(a) to 35(f) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 35(a) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 32(a). Next, FIG. 35B shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved downward and the character image h3 of the player is displayed on the sub display device 209, which is the same state as FIG. 34C. .. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27B (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). Further, FIG. 35B-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35B. .. The image data shown in FIG. 35(b-1) has a character image h3 of the lord and a character image h4 of the princess at the lower left of the character image h3 of the lord, and the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess are It is the image data in a non-rotated form. In addition, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. 35(b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35(b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35(b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 35(b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut around the center of the image data to obtain display data. FIG. 35(b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 35(b-2).

35C to 35E show a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice production of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45° counterclockwise in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then rotates clockwise. It is rotated by 45°. In addition, the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 35C to 35E indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 35C to 35E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

FIG. 35C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 30° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center from the state shown in FIG. 35B. .. Also, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 that has been completely cut off from the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower left part in a state in which it is not rotating as seen by the player. Also, FIG. 35C-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35C. The image data shown in FIG. 35(c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 35(b-1) by 30° in the clockwise direction with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 35C-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35C-1 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35C. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 35C-1 with the center of the image data as the center. FIG. 35(c-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 35(c-2) to turn the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35(b). The state rotated by 30° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 35C is shown.

FIG. 35D shows the sub display device 209 rotated counterclockwise by 15° from the state shown in FIG. 35C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. .. Further, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, on the sub-display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotating when viewed from the player. Also, FIG. 35D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35D. The image data shown in FIG. 35(d-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 35(c-1) clockwise by 15° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 35D-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35D-1 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35D. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 35D-1 with the center of the image data as the center. FIG. 35(d-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 35(d-2) to display the image on the sub display device 209.
35D shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 15°, and shows the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

FIG. 35(e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35(d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Also, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner not rotated by the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub display device 209. Further, FIG. 35E shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 35(e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35(e). The image data shown in FIG. 35(e-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 35(d-1) by 15° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). FIG. 35(e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35(e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35(e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 35(c-2). FIG. 35(e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 35(c-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35(d). The state of being rotated by 15° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. FIG. 35(e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 35(c-3).

35(f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates that the notification has been made. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of "○" is displayed to inform that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. 35(f), the sub display device 209 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 35(e) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 in the clockwise direction by 30° and returned to the original state. The state is shown. Also, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. 35(f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35(f). The image data shown in FIG. 35(f-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 35(e-1) 30° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 35(f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35(f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35(f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 35(b-2). FIG. 35(f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 35(f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35(e). The state rotated by 30° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. FIG. 35(f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 35(b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, while rotating the sub display device 209, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed, The character image h3 of the hall is displayed in a state where it is not rotated as seen from the player. In addition, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 that has been cut off on the sub display device 209 before the rotation display advance notice effect is executed is changed to the sub display device 20.
9 is displayed on the sub display device 209 by rotating the image displayed on the display device 9. The princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 rotates by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 209, which may improve the interest of the game. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 209, but a character is displayed in accordance with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. You may do so. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character in the hall may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the princess character image h4, the sub-display device 209 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle to cause the enemy of the lord. The character may be displayed in some cases. Moreover, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 of the hall and the character image h4 of the princess used for the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect.

(Example 9)
An effect example of Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 36(a) to 36(f) display the effects of the special game 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 36(a) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 32(a). Next, in FIG. 36(b), variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold/variable icons ends, and the variable icon display region. The change icon 941 is displayed at 940. Further, in FIG. 36B, the sub display device 209 moves downward, and a character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the center of the sub display device 209 and a character image h1′ of the merchant is displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 209. It shows the state of being performed. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27B (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). The merchant character image h1' is the same character image as the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970. Further, FIG. 36B-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36B. .. The image data shown in FIG. 36(b-1) has a lord's character image h3 and a princess's character image h4 at the lower left of the lord's character image h3. It is the image data in a non-rotated form. In addition, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. 36(b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36(b-1) in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36(b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 36(b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut around the center of the image data to obtain display data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 36(b-2) is stored in the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 36(b-1) at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the first sub control unit 400. It is display data in which the merchant character image h1′ read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 36(b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36(b-2). Although the merchant character image h1′ is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 36(b-1), the image data shown in FIG. 36(b-1) is displayed more than the merchant character image h1′. It may be displayed with priority.

FIGS. 36C to 36E show a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice production of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45° counterclockwise in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then rotates clockwise. It is rotated 45°. Further, the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line in the diagrams of FIGS. 36C to 36E indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 36C to 36E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

FIG. 36C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 30° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center from the state shown in FIG. 36B. .. Also, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the character image h1′ of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 209 is rotated from the sub display device 209 to change the state of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated counterclockwise by 30° about the center of rotation. Further, on the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 that has been completely cut off from the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image h1' in a manner that the player does not rotate. Further, FIG. 36C-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36C. The image data shown in FIG. 36(c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 36(b-1) clockwise by 30° about the center of the image data. 36C-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36C-1 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36C. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 36C-1 with the center of the image data as the center. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 36(c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 36(b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 36(c-1). It is display data in which the merchant character image h1′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 36(c-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36(c-2) so that the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36(b). The state rotated by 30° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 36C is shown.

FIG. 36(d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 15° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 36(c). .. Further, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the character image h1′ of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 209 is rotated from the sub display device 209 to change the state of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated counterclockwise by 15° about the center of rotation. Further, on the sub display device 209, to the right of the merchant character image h1′, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, FIG. 36D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36D. The image data shown in FIG. 36(d-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 36(c-1) by 15° in the clockwise direction with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 36D-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36D-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36D. The generated display data is shown. The display data is display data obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 36(d-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 36(d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 36(b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 36(d-1). It is display data in which the merchant character image h1′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 36(d-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36(d-2) so that the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36(c). The state after being rotated by 15° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 36D is shown.

FIG. 36(e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36(d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Also, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1′ displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 209 is rotated from the sub display device 209, so that the image display area of the sub display device 209 is changed from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated by 15° clockwise about the center of rotation. Further, on the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image h1′ in a manner not rotated by the player, and another part is displayed from the sub display device 209. I'm out of sight. Further, FIG. 36E shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect. Further, FIG. 36(e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36(e). The image data shown in FIG. 36(e-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 36(d-1) counterclockwise by 15° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 36(e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36(e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36(e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is display data obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 36(e-1). In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 36(e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 36(b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 36(e-1). It is display data in which the merchant character image h1′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 36(e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36(e-2) to rotate the sub display device 209 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36(d). It shows a state of being rotated by 15°, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

36(f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates that the notification has been made. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of "○" is displayed to inform that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. 36(f), the sub display device 209 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 36(e) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 by 30° in the clockwise direction to return to the original state. The state is shown. Further, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the character image h1′ of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 209 is rotated from the sub display device 209 to change the state of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in a state in which it is rotated clockwise by 30° about the center of rotation and returned to the original position. Further, on the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. 36(f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36(f). The image data shown in FIG. 36(f-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 36(e-1) 30° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 36(f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36(f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36(f). The generated display data is shown. The display data shown in FIG. 36(f-2) is stored in the first sub-control unit 400 at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 36(b-1). The display data is the display data obtained by superimposing the character image h1′ of the merchant read from the ROM 406, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 36(b-2). 36(f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36(f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36(e). A state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 30° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. FIG. 36(f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 36(b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, while the sub display device 209 is rotated, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 in a manner that the player does not rotate (the character image h3 of the lord). And a character image h4) of a princess and a character image (character image h1' of a merchant) displayed in a state of being rotated when viewed from the player. On the rotating sub display device 209, a character image displayed in a non-rotating state as viewed by the player and a character image displayed in a rotating state as viewed by the player are simultaneously displayed, It may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.

(Example 10)
An effect example of Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIGS. 37(a) to 37(f) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 37(a) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 35(a). Next, FIG. 37(b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 35(b). Further, FIG. 37B shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves downward and the character image h3 of the player is displayed on the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the hall is an image used for the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

37C to 37E show a state in which the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves in the horizontal direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The rectangles indicated by the two-dot chain lines in FIGS. 37(c) to 37(e) indicate the positions of the sub display device 209 before the horizontal movement.

FIG. 37C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 37B. Further, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode of moving to the right by the same distance as the left moving distance of the sub display device 209. There is. For this reason, the character image h3 of the hall is displayed as if it were not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the character image h4 of the princess that has been cut off in the sub display device 209 is displayed in the upper left portion. In addition, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability.

FIG. 37(d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved in the left lateral direction from the state shown in FIG. 37(c). Further, the character image h3 of the buttocks displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner that it moves rightward by the same distance as the left display moving distance of the sub display device 209. Therefore, the character image h3 of the hall is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it as if it is not moving. In the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left part.

FIG. 37(e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 37(d). Further, the character image h3 of the buttocks displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode of moving to the left by the same distance as the moving distance of the sub display device 209 to the right. For this reason, the character image h3 of the hall is displayed as if it were not moving when viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image h4 is cut off. Further, FIG. 37E shows a state immediately before the end of the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

37(f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Shows the state in which was notified. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of "○" is displayed to inform that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. Further, FIG. 37(f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved to the right and returned to the original state from the state shown in FIG. 37(e). Further, the character image h3 of the buttocks displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode in which the sub display device 209 moves leftward by the same distance as the rightward moving distance. Therefore, the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in a state of not moving as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed.

As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, by moving the sub display device 209 laterally, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is moved at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209. , The character image h3 of the hall is displayed in a state where it is not moving as seen from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 that has been cut off on the sub display device 209 before the lateral movement display notice effect is executed is displayed on the sub display device 209. The lateral movement display is performed so that it is displayed on the sub display device 209. The princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves a predetermined distance or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the moving distance of the sub display device 209, which may improve the interest of the game. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character may be displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character in the hall may be displayed. Further, while the sub display device 209 moves leftward by a predetermined distance to display the princess character image h4, the sub display device 209 moves rightward by a predetermined distance, so that the enemy character of the lord is displayed. May be displayed. The aspect ratio of the hall character image h3 and the princess character image h4 used for the lateral movement display notice effect may change during the lateral movement display notice effect.

(Example 11)
An effect example of Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38. 38(a) to 38(n) display the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and the eleventh embodiment to be described later has a performance movable body 990. The rendering movable body 990 can be two-dimensionally moved and rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). .. In addition, the effect movable body 990 may be configured to be movable and rotatable in three dimensions. Further, the production movable body 990 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a character string image of “CR Daito Machine” is displayed on the surface thereof.

FIG. 38(a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the judgment result of the special game 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display aspect which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the reserved number of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 38A shows a state in which the effectable movable body 990 is located at the central upper position of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 38A, the effectable movable body 990 is located at the initial position.

FIG. 38(b) shows that the suspension of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 to notify that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. Further, when the special figure 1 hold is decreased by one, and the special figure 1 variation game is started, a movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is shown. Further, in the hold display area 209b at the lower left of the sub display device 209, "0" indicating that the number of hold in the special figure 1 is 0 is displayed.

In FIG. 38( c ), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold/variable icons ends, and the variable icon 941 is displayed in the variable icon display area 940. Is displayed. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and white is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. A default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. Further, FIG. 38C shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. It shows the state.

FIG. 38(d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, an image of the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 38(e) shows a state in which an effect in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “logo drop effect”) is executed. The logo drop effect is an effect used to give a notice of "logo drop" shown in FIG. 27(b). In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the peripheral position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for the logo drop effect. Further, in FIG. 38(e), after the effect image h5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Figure 1 shows the state in which it is informed that the result of the variation game is out of sync. Further, by moving the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed. In addition, FIG. 38E illustrates a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. Note that the logo drop effect shown in FIG. 38(e) may be used as an effect combined with a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle, or is displayed in a black circle. The special icon 1 hold icon 953 displayed may be used as an effect in conjunction with it, or may be used alone as an effect of a prefetching notice. Next, FIG. 38F shows a state in which the production movable body 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 38E and returns to the original position shown in FIG. 38A. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased as the effecting movable body 990 moves upward.

FIG. 38(g) shows that the first special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 to show a state immediately after the movement animation between the hold/fluctuation icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 are started. Further, FIG. 38(g) shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. It shows the state.

FIG. 38(h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold/fluctuation icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 38(h), an image of a character string of "donor" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, which suggests that a character image h3 of the lord mentioned later appears. The production is being executed. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27B (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 38(i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the lower right part of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the character string "Called?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the lord. Further, an image of a character string of "Den!" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 38(j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

FIG. 38(k) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. Further, in FIG. 38(k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “rotation target image” in this example) are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the center of the area is rotated by 45° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in FIG. 38K, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), while the rotation shown in FIG. 38(k). The aspect ratio of the target image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 4:5. Further, a part of "decoration 3" and a part of the navigation character display area 970 displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in FIG. 38(k), in order to make the rotation display notice effect noticeable, the effecting movable body 990 moves to a position above the decorative symbol display device 208 that cannot be visually recognized by the player.

FIG. 38(l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45° counterclockwise (a total of 90° rotation) from the state of FIG. 38(k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 1:1. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 209, the rotation target image is not cut out. Further, FIG. 38(l) shows a state in which during the rotation display advance notice effect, a logo drop effect in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position (not shown) in FIG. 38(k) is executed. .. Further, the effect image h5 is displayed as a rotation target image on the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in FIG. 38(l), the effect image h5 is displayed in the left part of the effect display area 208d in a state rotated by 90° counterclockwise as viewed from the player, unlike the state shown in FIG. 38(e). ing. The size of the decorative pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device in the state of FIG. 38(l) is smaller than the size of the decorative pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device of the state of FIG. 38(e). It is the size. The same applies to the hold icon, the variable icon, the merchant character image h1, and the effect image h5.

In FIG. 38(m), the image to be rotated is rotated 270° counterclockwise (a total of 360° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 38(j). It shows the returned state. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio and the original size. Further, in FIG. 38(m), the effecting movable body 990 moves upward from the position of FIG. 38(l) and is located at the original position (the position of the state shown in FIG. 38(a)). .. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect image h5 is deleted. Next, in FIG. 38(n), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It shows a state in which it is notified. Further, by moving the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

Thus, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is placed on the position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a displayed effect. The effect image displayed at the position behind the production movable body 2990 may cause the player to emphasize the operation of the production movable body 990, and is displayed at a position different from the position behind the production movable body 990. The effect image displayed is such that the effect image is displayed at an unexpected position, which may give an unexpected surprise to the player. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the size of the effect image, the display color, and the display position.

(Example 12)
An effect example of Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39(a) to (f) display the effect of the special game 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 39(a) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 38(a). Next, FIG. 39B shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 38B. Next, in FIG. 39(c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and shows the same state as in FIG. 38(c).

FIG. 39D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, FIG. 39(d)
Shows a state in which an effect in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. 39C (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “logo drop effect”) is executed. The logo drop effect is an effect used to give a notice of "logo drop" shown in FIG. 27(b). In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the peripheral position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for the logo drop effect.

FIG. 39(e) shows a state where the island simultaneous production is started during the execution of the logo drop production. The island-simultaneous production is a production in which pachinko machines of the same model installed in the same island facility execute the same production at the same timing. In the island simultaneous production of the present embodiment, a mode in which the princess character image h6 is singing a song is displayed on the left side of the production display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The displayed decorative design is reduced and displayed in the lower right part of the decorative design display device 208. Also, a character string image of "Island simultaneous production start!" is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208. 39(e), the effect image h5 displayed in FIG. 39(d) is a position different from the position displayed in FIG. 39(d) in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is shown in a reduced size in the lower right corner. Further, FIG. 39E shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is displayed. The logo drop effect of the present embodiment may be used as an effect that suggests that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is performed, and a look-ahead notice is given. It may be used alone as an effect.

In FIG. 39( f ), during the island simultaneous production, the production movable body 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 39( d) and returns to the original position (the position shown in FIG. 39( a )). Is shown. In addition, a character string image of "Island simultaneous performance" is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 to notify that the island simultaneous performance is being performed. Further, the effect image h5 reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c reduced in the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicate "decoration 2". -Decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order. Further, by moving the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable member 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is placed at the position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect image is displayed at a position different from the state behind the effect movable body 990 on the decorative pattern display device 208 when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. There are states. The state in which the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effectable movable body 990 on the decorative symbol display device 208 may give the player unexpectedness, and the player may be surprised. It may be possible to provide a topic. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the size of the effect image, the display color, and the display position.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game table according to the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39 again.

(A1)
A gaming table provided with image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or a sub display device 209),
The image display means may rotate and display the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the hall).
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (for example, see FIGS. 28(j) to (q) or FIGS. 32(c) to (k)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, since the aspect ratio of the first image may change when the first image is rotated and displayed, the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, it may give a strong impression to the player. Further, there may be a case where any one of the images of the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, the background pattern, etc., or all of them may be the first image, or other than these images. The image may be the first image.

(A2)
The gaming machine described in (A1) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the hold icon or the hold number display) may not rotate (for example, FIGS. 30(j) to (q) or FIGS. 33(c) to (). See k)),
A game table characterized by that.
(A3)
The gaming machine described in (A2) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the fourth symbol) does not rotate (for example, see FIGS. 29(j) to (q)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, since the rotation display of the second image may not be performed when the rotation display of the first image is performed, the rotation display of the first image is emphasized. At the same time, it is possible for the player to clearly see the second image. Further, any one of the images of the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the background pattern, or all of these images may be used as the second image. The different image may be the second image.

(A4)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) that has been cut off in the image display unit before the rotation display is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation display. May be performed (see, for example, FIGS. 35(b) to (d)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the image that has been cut off in the image display means before the rotation display of the first image is performed is displayed on the image display means by performing the first rotation display. In some cases, this may give the player an unexpected surprise.

(A5)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a decorative pattern) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display may be cut off in the image display unit by the rotation display. There is (for example, see FIGS. 28(i) to (k)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, when the image displayed on the image display means before the rotation display of the first image is cut off by the image display means by the first rotation display. Therefore, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(A6)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(A7)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000),
A game table characterized by that.

(B1)
A movable body for performance (for example, a movable body 990 for performance),
Image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A gaming machine equipped with
When the effectable movable body is operated in front of the image display means, a first state (for example, FIG. 38E) in which a first image (for example, effect image h5) is displayed at a first position is displayed. The display state of the effect image h5 shown in the figure or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG.
The first position is a position behind the effecting movable body in the image display means (for example, see FIG. 38(e) or FIG. 39(d)),
The first image is an effect image,
A second state in which the first image is displayed at the second position when the effectable movable body is operated in front of the image display means (for example, display of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 38(l)). State or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 39(e)),
The second position is a position different from the back of the effecting movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 38(l) or FIG. 39(e)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table having the configuration, when the effecting movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the first image is placed at the second position which is different from the position behind the effecting movable body. The effect image of the first image may be displayed at a position that the player does not think because it may be in the second state in which the effect image of is displayed. May be possible.

(B2)
The gaming machine described in (B1) above,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effecting movable body in the image display means (for example, see FIG. 38(e) or FIG. 39(d)),
A game table characterized by that.
(B3)
The gaming table according to (B1) or (B2) above,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size (see, for example, FIG. 38(e), (f), or FIG. 39(d), (e)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, since the size of the first image in the first state and the size of the first image in the second state are different, the variation of the first image is enjoyed by the player. Sometimes you can.

(B4)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B3) above,
In the first state, a second image (for example, a decorative pattern) may be displayed in the first direction (for example, see FIG. 38(e)),
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in the second orientation (the orientation rotated 90° counterclockwise from the first orientation) (see, for example, FIG. 38(l)),
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(B5)
The gaming machine described in (B4) above,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size (see, for example, FIGS. 38(e) and (l)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, since the size of the second image in the first state and the size of the second image in the second state are different, the player can enjoy the variation of the second image. Sometimes you can. Further, any one of the images of the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the background pattern, or all of these images may be used as the second image. The different image may be the second image.

(B6)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(B7)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000),
A game table characterized by that.

(C1)
An image display unit (for example, a sub-display device 209) capable of displaying an effect image for effecting a game,
Drive means for driving the image display unit (for example, the performance movable body 225),
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means,
In a period (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around a rotation axis of the image display unit, or a linear direction),
A first moving image (for example, a moving image of the character image h3 of the lord or a moving image of the character image h4 of the princess) may be displayed on the image display unit,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image (for example, the hall character image h3 or the princess character image h4) moves in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above structure, the movement of the image display unit gives an impact, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the movement, thereby serving as a notification means. May allow the player to perform an unusual motion, which may allow the player to forget his or her daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, all the periods during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. Also, with a certain effect as an opportunity, all the periods from the time the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to the stop may be the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect. A part of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to when it stops may be set as the first period.

(C2)
The gaming machine described in (C1) above,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example in which the facial expression, outer shape, and the like of the first image (the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess) are fixedly displayed is shown. The outer shape and the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 35 as an example, the face of the lord, which was not displayed in FIG. 35(a), is displayed as a true face in FIG. 35(b), and in FIG. An animation may be performed in which a full smile is shown in 35(d), a little smile is returned in FIG. 35(e), and a true face is returned in FIG. 35(f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the hall) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image h3 of the hall moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, and changes in the outer shape of the character and the like, variable display of the serif (change display from the partial character string indicating the serif to the entire character string, etc.), character or icon Color change, moving display of characters or icons, or the like, or a combination of these.

(C3)
The gaming table according to (C1) or (C2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation,
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite orientations,
A game table characterized by that.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain effect (for example, the timing of starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). Direction (for example, leftward), and with other effects as an opportunity (for example, arrival of the timing to start effects by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the big hit begins) The first direction when the display unit operates may be another direction (for example, rightward). In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite direction, and in this case, the player is requested to move or rotate the first image faster than the moving or rotating of the image display unit. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and further, the first image in the image display unit is further accelerated. There are times when it becomes possible to focus on the game by forgetting the more everyday feeling from rotating and moving.

(C4)
The gaming machine described in (C3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit seems to be moving to the player, but the display position, display angle, etc. of the first image do not seem to be moving, so it is extraordinary as a notification means. When the notification itself by the image display unit can play the same role as when it does not move, and it is possible to make both impactful operation and notification There is. In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite to each other, and the first speed and the second speed may be different, and in that case, rather than moving or rotating the image display unit, The player visually recognizes that one image moves or rotates slowly. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is the image display unit. Since the movement and rotation are performed so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation, it may be possible to forget the more everyday feeling and concentrate on the game. Also, when the image display unit moves or rotates quickly with a focus on impact, by slowly moving or rotating the first image, the notification itself by the image display unit display becomes close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.

(C5)
The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image h1′) is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(C6)
The gaming machine described in (C5) above,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.

The gaming machine having the above configuration may be configured such that the second image that does not move in the first direction is not displayed during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movements of the image display unit and the image have a sense of unity and have a greater impact. The staging operation may be executable in some cases.

(C7)
The gaming table according to (C5) or (C6) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image,
A game table characterized by that.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example in which the facial expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1′) is fixedly displayed is shown, but according to the gaming machine having the configuration, The expression, outline, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, to explain with reference to FIG. 36, the face of the merchant, which was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 36A, is displayed as a true face in FIG. 36B, and a little in FIG. 36C. An animation may be performed such that the face becomes a steep face, the face becomes a steep face in FIG. 36(d), the face returns to a slightly steep face in FIG. 36(e), and returns to the true face in FIG. 36(f). Further, the aspect in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, and changes in the outer shape of the character and the like, variable display of the serif (change display from the partial character string indicating the serif to the entire character string, etc.), character or icon Color change, moving display of characters or icons, or the like, or a combination of these.

(C8)
The gaming table according to (C3) or (C4) above,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in (C1) above means “rotate by driving the driving means”,
"The first image moves in the first direction" described in (C1) above means "the first image rotates in the first direction",
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit (for example, a circumferential direction).
A game table characterized by that.
(C9)
The gaming machine described in (C8) above,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise,
A game table characterized by that.

(C10)
The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in (C1) above means “move linearly by driving the driving means”,
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (C1) above means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction”.
A game table characterized by that.

The above "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" may be "the first image moves linearly in the vertical direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" may be "the first image moves linearly in the left-right direction". In this case, the first direction is one of leftward and rightward. The above-mentioned "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" may be "the first image moves linearly in an oblique direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

A modified example of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, in the case where the driving means (movable body 225 for effect) shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 makes a combined movement of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, front-back direction when viewed from the player). There may be In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to include a plurality of image display units. In addition, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a performance movable body. In addition, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the production movable body is in the movable state, the image display unit is rotated or moved. It may be configured such that the effecting movable body is stopped and then moved to the initial state. Further, during the symbol variation display, the case where the effect operation shown in FIG. 34 is performed is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display than the case where the effect operation shown in FIG. 33 is performed. The mode may be configured to be a big hit mode easily, and when the effect operation of FIG. 33 is performed during the symbol variable display, the effect operation of FIG. 33 is performed, The symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variable display may be configured to be a big hit mode. Further, during the symbol variation display, when the effect operation of FIG. 33 is performed, the symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode, When the effect operation of FIG. 34 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode. 33 and 34 show an example in which the same effect display is performed, but when the sub display device shown in FIG. 33 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates together. The effect visually recognized by the player is different from the effect visually recognized by the player such that the image displayed on the sub display device shown in FIG. 34 does not rotate together when the sub display device rotates. It may be configured to produce the effect. For example, "one of the other productions" is a production in which the lord fights the musician, and "the other production of the other productions" is a production in which the princess dances. Good. One type of "one of other effects" may be installed, a plurality of types may be installed, and one type of "the other effect of another effects" may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. In addition, when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 33, at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device is rotated together with the number of types of effects. As shown in 34, when the sub-display device rotates, at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub-display device is visually recognized by the player so as not to rotate together. The number of types may be increased. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 34, at least part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player so as not to rotate together. More than the number of types of effects produced, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 33, at least part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device rotates together. The number of types may be increased.

Further, the effect example shown in FIG. 33 and the effect example shown in FIG. 34 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image does not rotate the image displayed on the sub-display so that it is visible to the player as it rotates with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed on the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed B′ (eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that for the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed C′ (eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as slowly rotating. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at the speed D (eg, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. Without rotating at least a part or all of the image in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed D (eg, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub-display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed by the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed E′ (eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed by the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed F′ (eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period before the sub display device finishes rotating (period G), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at speed G (eg, 20 rpm) to display on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so that it can be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. As described above, as illustrated in the periods A to D, as the period in which the sub display device rotates increases, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. By rotating the sub-display device and shifting to a state where the player can visually recognize that part or all of the display of the sub-display device is stopped, a new sense of unity with the sub-display device and images can be obtained. In some cases, it is possible to perform a certain effect. Further, as in the example from the period D to the period G, as the period in which the sub display device rotates advances, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device. By allowing the player to visually recognize such changes, it may be possible to perform a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced, and in the periods D to G, the sub display is performed. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased from period A to D. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and in the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. You may comprise so that the difference of speed may be made small gradually. Although the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated here, the present invention is also applicable to the linear display sub display device and the image displayed on the linear moving sub display device. Is also possible.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 68. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In the following description excluding FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the side closer to the player in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is installed in an island facility of a game store is referred to as “front” (front, front side, front side, front end, etc.). , And the opposite is "rear" (rear, rear, rear surface, rear end, etc.), vertically upward as seen from the player is "up" (upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and vice versa is "lower". "(Lower, lower, lower, etc.), the horizontal left from the player's side is "left" (left, left, left, etc.), and vice versa is "right" (right, right, right, etc.). ).

FIG. 40 is a schematic front view of the game board 1000 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front. A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is arranged in a center case in the center of a game area 124 defined by an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204. A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 drives the decorative symbol display device 208 and a lamp to perform an effect, and the details will be described later.

The game board 1000 of this example is a game board for so-called right-handed machines. As for the universal figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232, since these universal figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 are arranged on the right path, the entry of the game ball falling on the right path Is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball that falls down the left path. Regarding the variable winning port 234, due to the arrangement pattern of the game nails, it is relatively easy for a game ball to fall on the right path and relatively difficult for a game ball to drop on the left path. Note that in FIG. 40, the illustration of the game nail is omitted. On the other hand, with regard to the special figure 1 starting port 230, due to the presence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails, the warp device 242, etc., it is relatively easy to enter the game ball that falls on the left side path and the right side path. Entering a falling game ball is relatively difficult. In the present embodiment, the right-handing machine is used as an example, but a machine other than the right-handing machine may be used. In addition, a general winning opening (not shown) is provided on the right path and the left path.

On the front side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and the front stage 244 are arranged in a rolling area of the game ball, and a plurality of movable bodies are arranged in a non-rolling area of the game ball. Has been done. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has six movable bodies: a movable body 1002, a movable body 1004, a movable body 1006, a movable body 1008, a movable body 1010, and a movable body 1012. These movable bodies are arranged in order of the movable body 1010, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1002, the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and the movable body 1012 from the front side. The movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are arranged so that their positions in the front-rear direction are the same. The movable body 1004 is arranged on the front side of the movable body 1002. The drive control of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1010, and the movable body 1012 is executed by the second sub control unit 500. The drive control may be performed by the first sub control unit 400.

The movable body 1002 has a laterally elongated rectangular external shape when viewed from the front side. The movable body 1002 can move vertically behind the front stage 244. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. Further, the movable body 1002 has a sub display device 1030 on the front side.

A liquid crystal display device is used as the sub display device 1030. The sub display device 1030 includes a horizontally long rectangular display area smaller than the decorative pattern display device 208, and displays one or a plurality of images to perform an effect. In this example, the sub display device 1030 is displaying an image of the scenery of the sea where the yacht floats. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub display device 1030, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the display control of the sub display device 1030 is executed by the first sub control unit 400. The display control of the sub display device 1030 may be performed by the second sub control unit 500, or a display control unit that performs the display control may be newly provided. The display control unit may execute display control of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In addition, the movable body 1002 includes an elongated lighting portion 1014a, a lighting portion 1014b, a lighting portion 1014c, and a lighting portion 1014d which are arranged so as to surround the sub display device 1030. The illumination unit 1014a is arranged on the left side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014b is arranged below the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014c is arranged on the right side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014d is arranged above the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as light sources of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and the illumination units 1014a to 1014d can emit light of a plurality of colors.

A movable body 1004 is arranged at the upper left part of the movable body 1002. The movable body 1004 has an external shape that imitates lightning. The movable body 1004 is fixed at one point outside the display area of the sub display device 1030 and at the upper left portion of the movable body 1002. The movable body 1004 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), so that the movable body 1004 can rotate around the point in front of the sub display device 1030 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. The movable body 1004 overlaps the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the state in which the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1004. The initial position of the movable body 1004 is the position in which the movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise by 60° from the state shown in FIG. The movable body 1004 does not overlap the display area of the sub display device 1030 when it is located at the initial position.

On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1006 is arranged. The movable body 1006 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1002 has a plate-like shape, and a transmissive portion 1006a is provided on the upper portion and a transmissive portion 1006b is provided on the lower portion. The transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1006 is visible through the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b. Note that the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b only need to be visible on the rear side, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed on the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b, and the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b are openings. May be. Further, an elongated illumination unit 1016 is arranged at the right end on the front surface side of the movable body 1006. The illumination unit 1016 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1016, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light of a plurality of colors.

A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1006. The movable body 1006 moves left and right in accordance with the movement of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The moving range of the movable body 1006 is from the position where the right end of the movable body 1006 is located to the left of the left end of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 to the position where it is located in the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208. .. The movable body 1006 is invisible to the player in the state of being located at the left end of the operating range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position. When the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1006 overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transparent portions 1006a and 1006b of the movable body 1006.

On the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, a movable body 1008 is arranged. The movable body 1008 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1008 has a plate-like shape, and a transmissive portion 1008a is provided on the upper portion and a transmissive portion 1008b is provided on the lower portion. The transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1008 is visible through the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b. It should be noted that the transparent portions 1008a, 1008b only need to be visible from the rear side, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be arranged on the transparent portions 1008a, 1008b, and the transparent portions 1008a, 1008b are openings. May be. In addition, an elongated illumination unit 1018 is arranged at the left end on the front surface side of the movable body 1008. The illumination unit 1018 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of multiple colors are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1018, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light of multiple colors.

A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1008. The movable body 1008 moves left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The operation range of the movable body 1008 is from the position where the left end portion of the movable body 1008 is located to the right of the display area right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The movable body 1008 becomes invisible to the player in the state of being located at the right end of the operating range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. When the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1008 overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1008. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b of the movable body 1008.

The movable body 1006 functions as a left shutter, and the movable body 1008 functions as a right shutter. When the movable body 1006 moves to the right end of the movement range and the movable body 1008 moves to the left end of the movement range, the right end of the movable body 1006 and the left end of the movable body 1008 are in contact with each other. An effect of opening and closing the shutter is executed by the movable bodies 1006 and 1008.

A movable body 1010 is arranged above the decorative pattern display device 208. The movable body 1010 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and the character string of “chance” is attached to the front surface side. Further, the movable body 1010 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that it can move in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen. Further, when the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 are closed, the movable body 1010 can move in the vertical direction in front of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1010 is located at the initial position.

The movable body 1012 is arranged in the upper left portion of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 has an external shape similar to that of the movable body 1004, which imitates lightning. The movable body 1012 is fixed outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is fixed at one point on the upper left side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen with the point as the center of rotation. The movable body 1012 can rotate 60° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1012 may be rotatable by 360° or more.

Further, in the game board 1000, one sensor for detecting whether the movable bodies 1002 to 1012 are located at the initial position is arranged for each movable body. This sensor is included in the production movable body sensor 424 shown in FIG. A photo sensor is used as the sensor, for example.

A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is arranged on the rear side of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged at the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. In the state shown in FIG. 40, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 208d below the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a white circle change icon a1, a white circle hold icon b1, a white circle hold icon b2, and a character of "heat" in the white circle. A hold icon b3 in which is drawn and a black circle hold icon b4 are displayed side by side in this order from the left. The hold icon b1 shows the hold of the special figure 1 variable game with the first hold order, the hold icon b2 shows the hold of the second special figure 1 variable game with the hold order, and the hold icon b3 has the third hold order. The special figure 1 variable game is held, and the hold icon b4 indicates that the special order 1 variable game with the fourth holding order is held. A background image including images of the sun, clouds, and balloons is displayed in the effect display area 208d. A part of the image of the sun is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun is visible to the player via the transparent portion 1006a of the movable body 1006. Further, a part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible to the player via the transparent portion 1006b of the movable body 1006. A part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1002.

Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 includes an elongated illumination unit 1020, an illumination unit 1022, an illumination unit 1024, and an illumination unit 1026 which are arranged so as to surround the decorative pattern display device 208. The illumination unit 1020 is arranged on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1022 is arranged on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1024 is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 such that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1026 is arranged above the decorative pattern display device 208 such that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as light sources of the illumination units 1020 to 1026, and the illumination units 1020 to 1026 can emit light of a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the illumination units 1024 and 1026 are entirely visible to the player, only a portion of the illumination unit 1020 at the upper side is visible to the player via the transmissive unit 1006a, and the illumination unit 1022. Only a part above is visible to the player through the transparent portion 1008a.

Next, the movable body 1002 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the front. A motor 1040, which is a drive source of the movable body 1002, is arranged below the movable body 1002. The motor 1040 is fixed to the center case of the game board 1000 so that the rotation axis is vertical. One end of the screw shaft 1042 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1040 so that the extending direction is the vertical direction.

A lower base 1044 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the motor 1040. The lower base 1044 is fixed to the game board 1000. The motor 1040 and the lower base 1044 are arranged on the lower rear side of the front stage 244 and are invisible to the player. Further, the lower base 1044 has a receiving portion 1044a having a flat surface for receiving the movable body 1002 on the right side, and has a shaft fixing portion 1044b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. The receiving portion 1044a and the shaft fixing portion 1044b are in different steps, and the receiving portion 1044a is located at a position higher than the shaft fixing portion 1044b. Therefore, when the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost part of the movement range, the movable body 1002 comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a but does not come into contact with the shaft fixing portion 1044b.

Further, the receiving portion 1044a is provided with a through hole that vertically penetrates the lower base 1044, and a slide bearing is arranged in the through hole. The screw shaft 1042 passes through the slide bearing and is supported by the slide bearing.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 41A, the movable body 1004 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1004 can rotate clockwise by about 60° from the initial position. The movable body 1004 may be rotatable by 60° or more (for example, 360°).

41B and 41C show the movable body 1002 viewed from the rear right side. In the state shown in FIG. 41(b), the movable body 1002 is located at the top of the moving range. In the state shown in FIG. 41C, the movable body 1002 is located at the bottom of the moving range. As shown in FIGS. 41B and 41C, the movable body 1002 includes a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a moving unit 1036. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, is arranged in front of the movable body 1002, and includes a movable body 1004, illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and a sub display device 1030, as shown in FIG.

The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a driver for the sub display device 1030, LEDs of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, an LED driver, a motor for driving the movable body 1004, and gears. Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a rectangular window portion 1034a, a window portion 1034b, a window portion 1034c, a window portion 1034d (not shown in FIG. 41B), and a window portion 1034e on the rear side. The window portion 1034a is arranged behind the lighting portion 1014a, the window portion 1034b is arranged behind the lighting portion 1014b, the window portion 1034c is arranged behind the lighting portion 1014c, and the window portion 1034d is arranged behind the lighting portion 1014d. Has been done. Transparent plates are arranged in the windows 1034a to 1034e, and the front side of the windows 1034a to 1034e can be visually recognized. LEDs, an LED driver mounting board, a lens for decoration, and the like are arranged on the front side of the windows 1034a to 1034d. The windows 1034a to 1034d are used to inspect the lighting unit. The window portion 1034e is arranged behind the movable body 1004. A motor for driving the movable body 1004 and a gear that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor and transmits power to the movable body 1004 are arranged on the front side of the window 1034e. The window 1034e is used for checking the drive mechanism of the movable body 1004.

The moving unit 1036 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape smaller than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and is arranged on the rear surface side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The moving unit 1036 has therein a motor that drives the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to rotate, and a gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor and that transmits the power of the motor to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 are connected via a harness. Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is installed in the moving unit 1036 so as to be rotatable about the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the same plane including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the initial posture. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate 180° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 41B, and can rotate counterclockwise 180° from the initial posture. Thus, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 also functions as a movable body.

Note that when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable unit 1036 are connected using a connection unit (slip ring or the like) shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 described later, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. In this direction, it may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees, and there is no limitation on the rotation angle.

Further, the moving unit 1036 is provided with two through-holes penetrating in the vertical direction. A nut is fixed to the right through hole, and the screw shaft 1042 is fitted in the nut. The movable body 1002 can be moved up and down by moving the nut up and down by the rotation of the screw shaft 1042. A guide shaft 1046 passes through the left through hole. The movable body 1004 is guided by the guide shaft 1046 and can move stably up and down.

An upper base 1048 is arranged above the moving unit 1036. The upper base 1048 is fixed to a transparent plate (not shown) arranged at a position in the front-rear direction between the movable body 1002 and the movable bodies 1006, 1008, and is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 1048 has a receiving portion 1048a having a flat surface for receiving the moving unit 1036 on the right side, and has a shaft fixing portion 1048b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. A slide bearing is arranged in the receiving portion 1048b, and the other end of the screw shaft 1042 is supported by the slide bearing. Further, the receiving portion 1048a and the shaft fixing portion 1048b are stepped, and the receiving portion 1048a is located at a position lower than the shaft fixing portion 1048b. Further, the moving unit 1036 has an upper surface portion 1036a having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1048a when moved to the uppermost position. As shown in FIG. 41B, when the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position, the upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

Further, the moving unit 1036 has a lower surface portion 1036b having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044 when the moving unit 1036 moves to the lowermost position. As shown in FIG. 41C, when the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

Further, the moving unit 1036 includes a control unit for controlling the moving operation of the movable body 1002 and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 inside. Examples of movement control means arranged in the movement unit 1036 include a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, a communication control circuit, and the like. The moving unit 1036 may be provided with only one of these movement control means, or may be provided with a plurality thereof. In addition, a harness (not shown) having one end connected to the sub display device 1030 extends from the rear side of the moving unit 1036, and the other end of the harness is a control board (for example, disposed on the back surface side of the game board 1000). It is connected to the first sub-board 160). Note that the other end of the harness may be connected to the relay board, and the sub display device 1030 and the control board may be connected via the harness and the relay board.

Next, the operation of the movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41(b) and 41(c). FIG. 41B shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position in the movement range. The upper surface 1036a of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1048a of the upper base 1048. The receiving portion 1048a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002.

From the state shown in FIG. 41B, when the motor 1040 is driven to rotate the screw shaft 1042 clockwise when viewed from the lower side to the upper side, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted into the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves below the shaft 1042. As a result, the movable body 1002 moves downward.

FIG. 41C shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position in the movement range. The lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044. The receiving portion 1044a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002. Further, when the screw shaft 1042 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the lower side to the upper side by the motor 1040 from the state shown in FIG. 41C, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted into the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves above the shaft 1042. As a result, the movable body 1002 moves upward.

Further, when the movable body 1002 is stopped at a position higher than the lowermost position, a load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 by the weight of the movable body 1002. Therefore, a torque having a magnitude commensurate with the load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 by the motor 1040. .. This prevents the screw shaft 1042 from rotating due to the load of the movable body 1002 by its own weight, and the movable body 1002 can be stopped.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off for some reason while the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowermost position, electric power for driving the motor 1040 cannot be obtained. Therefore, the screw shaft 1042 rotates clockwise when viewed from below from above due to the load of the movable body 1002 by its own weight, and the movable body 1002 moves until it comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044b of the lower base 1044. Even when the movable body 1002 moves downward by its own weight, the movable body 1002 can be received by the receiving portion 1044b, so that the movable body 1002 can be prevented from being damaged.

(Example 1)
42 and 43 show examples of effects in Example 1 of the present embodiment. 42 and 43 show the effect state in time series. 42(a) to (q), (t), (u), (x) to (z), (a) to (d), and FIG. 43 are each a game of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42(r) and 42(s) show the main liquid crystal unit 1001 alone, and FIGS. 42(v) and 42(w) show the movable body 1002 alone. In addition, in FIG. 42 and subsequent figures, the illustration of the universal image display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the high accuracy middle lamp 222 is omitted. However, the illustration of the game ball is also omitted.

FIG. 42(a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42(a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is higher than the lowermost position shown in FIG. 41(c), and is closer to the lowermost position than the uppermost position shown in FIG. 41(b). When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. Moreover, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun is visible through the transmissive part 1006a. Has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible through the transmissive portion 1006b.

FIG. 42(b) continuing from FIG. 42(a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice hold icon as shown in FIG.

FIG. 42(c) continuing from FIG. 42(b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon, and a movement animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 42(d) subsequent to FIG. 42(c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. 42 and subsequent figures, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a downward thick white arrow. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative design is started after the start of the movement animation of the hold/change icon.

FIG. 42E continuing from FIG. 42D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. 42(e) and thereafter, the reach effect is started.

FIG. 42F continuing from FIG. 42E shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost part of the operation range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image becomes invisible to the player. In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the decorative pattern or the notice image (for example, the image of the sun, cloud, balloon, hold icon, change icon, etc.) overlaps the movable body and becomes invisible to the player. In comparison with the case where at least a part of the decorative pattern or the notice image does not overlap with the movable body, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed or the special figure variation game being held. It may be configured as follows.

FIG. 42(g) subsequent to FIG. 42(f) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position of the moving range of the movable body 1010. When the movable body 1010 returns to the initial position, the production operation of the movable body 1010 in the reach production is finished.

FIG. 42(h) subsequent to FIG. 42(g) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the right. A part of the sun image and a part of "decoration 2" are visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006b. When the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 42(g) and when the movable body 1006 is moved rightward from the initial position as shown in FIG. 42(h), an image of the sun and The visible part of the cloud image is different. When the sun image or the cloud image is displayed as the notice image, the visible portion of the notice image is different before and after the movement of the movable body. In the pachinko machine 100, when the visible part of the notice image before and after the movement of the movable body is different, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed or the special figure variation game being held is increased. It may be configured.

FIG. 42I continuing from FIG. 42H shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved leftward and returned to the initial position. As a result, the production operation of the movable body 1006 in the reach production is completed.

FIG. 42(j) subsequent to FIG. 42(i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the initial position. A part of the cloud image and a part of the "decoration 2" are visually recognized through the transparent part 1008a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transparent part 1008b. As a result, when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 42(i) and when the movable body 1008 is moved leftward from the initial position as shown in FIG. The visible parts of the image and the cloud image are different. In the pachinko machine 100, when the visible part of the notice image before and after the movement of the movable body is different, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed or the special figure variation game being held is increased. It may be configured.

FIG. 42K continuing from FIG. 42J shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. As a result, the production operation of the movable body 1008 in the reach production is completed.

FIG. 42(l) subsequent to FIG. 42(k) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position from the initial position. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and starts the production operation.

FIG. 42(m) subsequent to FIG. 42(l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by 180° from an initial posture in which the upper and lower end sides are parallel to the horizontal direction and the left and right end sides are parallel to the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 42(l). Is. In FIG. 42(m), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 45°.

42(n) subsequent to FIG. 42(m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by 90° from the state shown in FIG. 42(m). As shown in FIGS. 42(l) to 42(n), the visible parts of the balloon image and the cloud image are different before and after the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. When a balloon image or a cloud image is displayed as a notice image, the noticeable part of the notice image is different before and after the movement of the movable body. In the case of the pachinko machine 100, when the visible part of the notice image is different before and after the operation of the movable body, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed or the special figure variation game being held is increased. It may be configured.

42O subsequent to FIG. 42N shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° from the state shown in FIG. 42N and returned to the initial posture.

FIG. 42(p) continuing from FIG. 42(o) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved downward and returned to the initial position. As a result, the production operation of the movable body 1002 in the reach production is completed.

FIG. 42(q) subsequent to FIG. 42(p) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated 60° clockwise from the initial position. 42(r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted at the same timing as FIG. 42(q), and shows the movable body 1012 rotated by 60° in the clockwise direction from the initial position. Due to the rotating operation of the movable body 1012, the movable body 1012 and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other. Therefore, the movable body 1012 makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the image of the sun and part of the "decoration 2". In the pachinko machine 100, when at least a part of the notice image such as the image of the sun becomes invisible to the player after the operation of the movable body, in the special figure variation game being executed or the special figure variation game being held. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning a big hit.

FIG. 42(s) subsequent to FIGS. 42(q) and (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001, and the movable body 1012 moves counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 42(q) and 42(r). It shows a state in which it has rotated 90° and returned to the initial position. 42(t) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 42(s). When the movable body 1012 returns to the initial position, the production operation of the movable body 1012 in the reach production is finished.

FIG. 42(u) subsequent to FIGS. 42(s) and 42(t) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated by 60° in the clockwise direction from the initial position. FIG. 42(v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted at the same timing as in FIG. 42(u) and shows the movable body 1004 rotated 60° clockwise from the initial position. The rotating operation of the movable body 1004 causes the movable body 1004 and the image of the seascape displayed on the sub display device 1030 to overlap each other. Therefore, the movable body 1004 makes a part of the image of the seascape invisible to the player. The image of the seascape may be displayed as a notice image. In the pachinko machine 100, when at least a part of the notice image such as an image of the sea becomes invisible to the player after the operation of the movable body, in the special figure variation game being executed or the special figure variation game being held. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning a big hit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 42(u), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special display area 208d is displayed. A white circular hold icon is displayed.

42(w) subsequent to FIGS. 42(u) and (v) shows only the movable body 1002 in an extracted manner, and the movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 42(u) and (v) by 60 degrees. It shows the state that it has been rotated and returned to the initial position. 42(x) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 42(w). When the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position, the production operation of the movable body 1004 in the reach production is finished.

42(w) and FIG. 42(y) continuing from (x) show the state where the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a marginal result. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special display 1 variable display result is out of alignment.

FIG. 42(z) subsequent to FIG. 42(y) shows a state in which the variation icon erasing animation is executed during non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the effect display area 208d, the black circular variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

FIG. 42(a) continuing from FIG. 42(z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon, and a movement animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 42(b) continued from FIG. 42(a), based on the first sub-control unit 400 receiving the symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Shows the state. The symbol variation start command includes information on the variation time. The fluctuation time of this example is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

FIG. 42C, which continues from FIG. 42B, shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 has been turned off due to the power interruption occurring 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off. Further, in this example, all the movable bodies other than the movable body 1002 stand still at the position of the timing at which the power interruption occurred.

FIG. 42D subsequent to FIG. 42C shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowest position in the movement range by its own weight. The movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-off non-operating state. The lowermost position of the movable body 1002 is the non-operating position of the movable body 1002. When the movable body 1002 is located at the non-operating position, only the upper end of the display area of the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized by the player.

FIG. 43A continuing from FIG. 42D shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

FIG. 43B continuing from FIG. 43A shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. The pachinko machine 100 is activated in order of the main controller 300, the first sub controller 400, and the second sub controller 500 when the power is turned on. In FIG. 43(b), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control is started. On the decorative pattern display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, a character string image of "starting..." Is displayed.

FIG. 43(c) subsequent to FIG. 43(b) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 43D continuing from FIG. 43C shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 43(d), the movable body 1002 has moved to the uppermost position. Further, a character string image of “in initial operation” is displayed on the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002, similarly to the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 43E continuing from FIG. 43D shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° from the initial posture. FIG. 43(f) following FIG. 43(e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 90° from the state shown in FIG. 43(e). 43(g) continued from FIG. 43(f), the movable body 1002 is moved to the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° from the state shown in FIG. 43(f) to return to the initial posture. It shows a moved state. In the initial operation of the movable body 1002 of this example, first, the movable body 1002 moves from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, and then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates counterclockwise from the initial posture by 45°, and then, , The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates clockwise by 90°, then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates counterclockwise by 45° and returns to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is the start position of the effect operation of the movable body 1002.

43(h) subsequent to FIG. 43(g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position in the movement range. FIG. 43( i) following FIG. 43( h) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position (uppermost position) to the lowermost position, and then the movable body 1010 returns from the lowermost position to the initial position. .. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

FIG. 43(j) subsequent to FIG. 43(i) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 43(k) subsequent to FIG. 43(j) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 returns from the rightmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

FIG. 43(l) continuing from FIG. 43(k) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 43(m) subsequent to FIG. 43(l) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1008 of this example, first, the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the leftmost position, and then the movable body 1008 returns from the leftmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1008 is completed.

FIG. 43(n) subsequent to FIG. 43(m) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 rotates 60° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 43( o) subsequent to FIG. 43( n) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 rotates counterclockwise by 60° and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1012 of this example, first, the movable body 1012 rotates 60° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1012 rotates 60° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1012 is completed.

FIG. 43( p) following FIG. 43( o) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 rotates 60° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 43(q) subsequent to FIG. 43(p) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise by 60° and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 in this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. Further, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.

In this example, the movable body 1002, the movable body 1010, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1012, and the movable body 1004 perform the initial operation of the movable body in this order. The execution order of the initial operation of the movable body can be set arbitrarily.

FIG. 43(r) continuing from FIG. 43(q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 is being executed. If the power failure occurs during execution of the special figure variation game, the first sub-control unit 400, after the completion of the initial operation of the movable body, until the symbol variation stop command is received from the main control unit 300, the decoration The symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are controlled to be the preparation screen. As a result, the character string image of "preparing" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 43(r), one game ball is inserted into the special figure 1 starting port 230, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hold icon indicating the increased hold because of the preparing screen. I haven't. The leftmost LED of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on, and the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218 informs that the number of holdings of the Toku-zu 1 is 1.

Further, the main control unit 300, by the power interruption process (step S243) executed at the time of the power interruption, the determination result of the running special figure 1 variation game stored in the RAM 308, the stop determination, the variation time, the special figure 1 A display symbol update timer or the like is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data. The main control unit 300 returns to the gaming state before the power interruption based on the return data by the power recovery process after the power is turned on (step S111). As a result, the main control unit 300 executes control to end the special figure 1 variable game when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game that was being executed at the time of power interruption has passed 30 seconds.

FIG. 43(s) continuing from FIG. 43(r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The result of the special figure 1 variation game of this example is a loss. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the design variation stop command including the information that the hit/miss determination result is out of order from the main control unit 300, based on the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. Restart. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is an outlying symbol combination, is stopped and displayed, and in the effect display area 208d, an image of the sun and clouds. A background image including an image of and a balloon image is displayed. Further, since the special figure 1 has a hold of 1, one white circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game that was executed before the power interruption is not displayed in the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power restoration. Further, an image of the seascape is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 43(t) continuing from FIG. 43(s) shows a state in which one of the special figure 1 reservations has been digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. After the start of the special game 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon and a movement animation between the hold and variation icons that moves to the left is displayed, and then the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 has the second sub control unit 500.
Waits at the initial position until receives the staging operation start command. Further, the movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost position. When the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes visible. Therefore, when the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the notice image overlapping with the movable body 1008 may be visible when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. When the notice image becomes visible, the pachinko machine 100 makes a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed or the special figure variation game being held, as compared to the case where the notice image remains invisible. The winning probability may be increased.

FIG. 43(u) subsequent to FIG. 43(t) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the effect operation. The second sub-control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on receiving a command including a command to start the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub-control unit 400. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

43(v) subsequent to FIG. 43(u) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1002 waits at the initial position until the second sub control unit 500 receives the effect operation start command. Moreover, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and a black circle holding icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. ..

FIG. 43(w) continuing from FIG. 43(v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a marginal result. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is out. Further, the movable body 1008 has returned to the initial position. Also, the variation icon erasing animation is executed while the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon of a white circle is erased.

FIG. 43(x) continuing from FIG. 43(w) shows a state in which one special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. After the start of the special game 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon and a movement animation between the hold and variation icons that moves to the left is displayed, and then the variation display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 waits at the initial position for receiving a production operation start command.

FIG. 43(y) subsequent to FIG. 43(x) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the effect operation. The second sub-control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on receiving a command including a command to start the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, after the movable body 1002 is moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 60°.

FIG. 43( z) subsequent to FIG. 43( y) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, the movable body 1002 moves downward and returns to the initial position. It should be noted that the movable body 1002 may move downward during execution of the rotation operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture.

FIG. 43(a) continuing from FIG. 43(z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a marginal result. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is out.

FIG. 43B continuing from FIG. 43A shows a state in which the changing icon erasing animation is executed during the stop display of the decorative pattern. As a result, the black circular variation icon is erased.

In this embodiment, the movable body 1002 starts the effect operation from the initial position and ends the effect operation at the initial position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position, and may end the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The start position of the effect operation of the movable body 1002 and the end position of the effect operation may be the same or different.
A game table characterized by that.

Further, when the power source is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position (for example, the fourth position), the movable body 1002 is at the lowermost position from the fourth position. May be configured to move to.

When the movable body 1002 is turned off in the third position, which is a position other than the fourth position, the initial position, and the lowermost position, the movable body 1002 also moves from the third position. It is configured to move to the lowest position.

In addition, a fourth control unit (for example, the second sub control unit 500) that controls the movable body 1002 and a drive unit that drives the movable body 1002 are provided.

In addition, a sensor that detects whether or not the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position is provided, and when the sensor detects that the movable body 1002 is not located at the initial position when the power is turned off, The movable body 1002 is configured to move to the lowermost position. In addition, when the sensor is provided with a sensor for detecting whether or not the movable body is in the initial posture, and when the sensor detects that the movable body is not in the initial posture when the power is turned off, the movable body is set to the initial posture. It may be configured to return to. The drive control of the movable body 1002 in this embodiment may be applied to another movable body.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 shows an example of effects in Example 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 shows the effect state in time series. 44. Each figure of FIG. 44 has shown the schematic front of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 44(a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variation game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 44(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 44A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions.

FIG. 44(b) continued from FIG. 44(a), based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 and increased. It shows the state where the suspension of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. The variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and a black circular variation icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

FIG. 44C continuing from FIG. 44B shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started execution of the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. The movable bodies 1002 and 1010 may start moving at the same timing, or one of them may come first. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is set so that the larger the number of movable bodies that move to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing, the higher the probability of winning the big hit in the special figure variation game being executed. May be.

FIG. 44(d) subsequent to FIG. 44(c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 execute the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 executes the effect operation. In the present embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 44C, and can rotate counterclockwise 180° from the initial posture. The initial posture of the movable body 1010 is a posture in which the upper and lower ends of the movable body 1010 are parallel to the horizontal direction. Further, as the drive mechanism for rotating the movable body 1010, a drive mechanism similar to the drive mechanism for rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be adopted. In the state shown in FIG. 44D, the movable body 1010 rotates clockwise by 30°, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates clockwise by 30°, and the movable body 1006 moves to the right from the initial position. The operation start timings of the movable body 1010, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and the movable body 1006 may be the same, the operation start timings of the two movable bodies may be the same, or the operation start of the three movable bodies may be started. The timing may be different. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is set so that the more the number of movable bodies that rotate in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing, the higher the probability of winning the big hit in the special figure variation game being executed. May be

FIG. 44E continuing from FIG. 44D shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered off due to an electric power interruption during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 44F continuing from FIG. 44E shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is in the power-off state. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position and the initial posture even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. Be prepared for. When the power is cut off, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power source supplied from the power storage circuit to return the movable body to the initial position and the initial posture. In this embodiment, when the power is cut off, the control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, but the control for returning the movable body 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable body 1006 remains stationary at the position when the power interruption occurred. Note that the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and if the movable body 1006 is cut off after the rotating operation is performed, the movable body 1006 remains stationary in a state of being rotated from the initial posture.

FIG. 44(g) continuing from FIG. 44(f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 100 is powered off, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowermost position below the initial position. The second sub control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control of moving the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

FIG. 44H continuing from FIG. 44F shows a state where the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 44(i) continuing from FIG. 44(h) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

FIG. 44(j) subsequent to FIG. 44(i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for power-on.

FIG. 44(k) subsequent to FIG. 44(j) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 44(k), the startup of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being started, and the first sub control is started. On the decorative pattern display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, a character string image of "starting..." Is displayed. In addition, the character image of “start” in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

FIG. 44(l) subsequent to FIG. 44(k) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 44(m) subsequent to FIG. 44(l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 44(m), the movable body 1002 has moved from the lowermost position to the uppermost position. Further, a character string image of “in initial operation” is displayed on the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002, similarly to the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 44(n) continuing from FIG. 44(m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° from the initial posture. FIG. 44( o) following FIG. 44( n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 90° from the state shown in FIG. 44( n ). 44P continuing from FIG. 44O, the movable body 1002 is moved to the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the state shown in FIG. It shows a moved state. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed.

FIG. 44(q) subsequent to FIG. 44(p) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowermost position. FIG. 44(r) subsequent to FIG. 44(q) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has rotated 45° clockwise from the initial posture. 44(s) subsequent to FIG. 44(r) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has rotated counterclockwise by 45° from the state shown in FIG. 44(r) and has returned to the initial position. FIG. 44(t) subsequent to FIG. 44(s) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of the present example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowest position, then the movable body 1010 rotates 45° clockwise from the initial posture, and then the movable body 1010. Rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1010 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

FIG. 44(u) subsequent to FIG. 44(t) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. When the movable body 1006 is stopped at a position other than the initial position when the initial operation starts, the movable body 1006 first returns to the initial position. 44(v) following FIG. 44(u) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 44W continuing from FIG. 44V shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 returns to the initial position, then the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 moves to the rightmost position. To return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

FIG. 44(x) subsequent to FIG. 44(w) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. 44(y) subsequent to FIG. 44(x) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position.

FIG. 44(z) subsequent to FIG. 44(y) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 rotates 60° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 44A continuing from FIG. 44Z shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 has rotated 60° counterclockwise and has returned to the initial position.

In addition, in FIG. 44A, the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 rotates 60° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 44B continuing from FIG. 44A shows a state in which the movable body 1004 rotates counterclockwise by 60° and returns to the initial position. FIG. 44C continuing from FIG. 44B shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated by 60° in the clockwise direction. FIG. 44C continuing from FIG. 44C shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has rotated clockwise by 60° and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60° clockwise from the initial position, then the movable body 1004 rotates 60° counterclockwise to return to the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position. The movable body 1004 rotates 60° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. In this way, the same operation may be performed multiple times in the initial operation of the movable body. Further, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 shows an example of effects in Example 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 45 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 45(a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variation game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 45(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 45A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions.

45(b) continuing from FIG. 45(a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and increased. It shows the state where the suspension of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. The variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and a black circular variation icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

FIG. 45(c) subsequent to FIG. 45(b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started performing the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position.

FIG. 45D continuing from FIG. 45C shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the movable body 1004, and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 execute the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 executes the effect operation. There is. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 45C, and can rotate 180° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In the state shown in FIG. 45D, the movable body 1010 rotates clockwise 30°, the movable body 1004 rotates clockwise 60°, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates clockwise 30°, and the movable body 1006 rotates. Has moved to the right from its initial position. The operation start timings of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1004 may be the same or different.

FIG. 45(e) continuing from FIG. 45(d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to an electric power interruption during the execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 45F continuing from FIG. 45E shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is powered off. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position and the initial posture even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. Be prepared for. When the power is cut off, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power source supplied from the power storage circuit to return the movable body to the initial position and the initial posture. In this embodiment, when the power is cut off, the control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, but the control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable bodies 1004 and 1006 remain stationary at the position when the power interruption occurred. Note that the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and if the movable body 1006 is cut off after the rotating operation is performed, the movable body 1006 remains stationary in a state of being rotated from the initial posture. Further, control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position may be executed.

FIG. 45(g) continuing from FIG. 45(f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 100 is powered off, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowermost position below the initial position. The second sub control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control of moving the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

FIG. 45(h) subsequent to FIG. 45(g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 45(i) subsequent to FIG. 45(h) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

FIG. 45(j) subsequent to FIG. 45(i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for power-on.

FIG. 45(k) subsequent to FIG. 45(j) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 45(k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, and the first sub control unit 400 is in operation, and the first sub control On the decorative pattern display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, a character string image of "starting..." Is displayed. In addition, the character image of “start” in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

FIG. 45(l) subsequent to FIG. 45(k) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 45(m) subsequent to FIG. 45(l) shows a state where the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, when there is a movable body stopped at a position different from the initial position when the initial operation of the movable body is started, control for returning the movable body to the initial position is executed. In FIG. 45(m), first, the movable body 1006 is returned to the initial position.

FIG. 45(n) subsequent to FIG. 45(m) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1004 rotates counterclockwise by 60° and returns to the initial position.

FIG. 45(o) continuing from FIG. 45(n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial value from the lowermost position. FIG. 45( p) continuing from FIG. 45( o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the initial operation and moved to the uppermost position. The movable body 1002 starts initial operation after returning to the initial position.

(Example 4)
FIG. 46 shows an example of effects in Example 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 46 shows the effect state in time series. 46(a) to 46(n) show schematic front views of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 46(a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variation game is out. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 46(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 46(a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions.

FIG. 46(b) continued from FIG. 46(a), based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 and increased. It shows the state where the suspension of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. The variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and a black circular variation icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

46C continuing from FIG. 46B shows a state in which the movable body 1002 starts execution of the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

FIG. 46D continuing from FIG. 46C shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has executed the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 180°.

FIG. 46(e) continuing from FIG. 46(d) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered off due to power failure during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 46F continuing from FIG. 46E shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position by its own weight without the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returning to the initial posture. In this example, the control for returning the movable body to the initial posture or the initial position when the power is cut off is not executed.

46(g) subsequent to FIG. 46(g) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for power-on.

46(h) subsequent to FIG. 46(g) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 46(h), the startup of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being started, and the first sub control is started. The character string image of "starting..." Is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, and the character string image of "starting" is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 46(i) subsequent to FIG. 46(h) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

46(j) subsequent to FIG. 46(i) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body 1002 has started. After the movable body 1002 is moved to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating clockwise. In the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 executes an operation of rotating 180 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. In this example, since the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is stationary while rotating counterclockwise 180° from the initial posture at the time of starting the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360° clockwise after the initial operation is started.

FIG. 46(k) subsequent to FIG. 46(j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180° clockwise from the initial posture and is still. FIG. 46(l) following FIG. 46(k) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating counterclockwise. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 46(k) and then rotates 180° clockwise to return to the initial posture. FIG. 46(m) subsequent to FIG. 46(l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture. 46(n) following FIG. 46(m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the initial position. The movable body 1002 ends the initial operation when it moves to the initial position.

FIG. 46( o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 in the states shown in FIGS. 46( f) to (i) is viewed from the rear right side. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 180° from the initial posture. As shown in FIG. 46( o ), a lower escape portion 1050 having a space for allowing the movable body 1002 to escape is provided below the front side of the lower base 1044. The lower side escape portion 1050 is provided in the center case of the game board 1000 below the rear side of the front stage 244 of the game board 1000. At the lowermost end of the lower side escape portion 1050, a receiving portion 1052 having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is arranged. A buffer portion 1054 is provided on the upper surface of the receiving portion 1052. A sheet-shaped cushioning member is used for the cushioning section 1054.

When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by, for example, 45° or more from the initial position, the moving unit 1036 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 cannot be received by the lower base 1044, but the lower escape portion 1050 It can be received by the receiving portion 1052. This can prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with peripheral devices and peripheral members even if the movable body 1002 having a posture different from the initial posture moves to the lower limit position.

Although illustration is omitted, when the movable body 1002 can move above the initial position of the movable body 1010, an upper side relief portion may be provided. Similar to the lower relief portion 1050, the upper relief portion is provided to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with peripheral devices and peripheral members. It suffices that the upper side escape portion is provided with a receiving portion having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a buffer portion on the lower surface of the receiving portion.

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 shows an example of effects in Example 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 47 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 47 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 47(a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 47(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 47A, the movable bodies 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial position.

FIG. 47(b) continuing from FIG. 47(a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one.

47 (c) which continues from FIG. 47 (b) has shown the state where the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212 not shown has started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon, and a movement animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 47(d) continuing from FIG. 47(c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is started.

FIG. 47E continuing from FIG. 47D shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach production is started after FIG. 47(e).

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotatable. As the drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the same mechanism as the drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the above embodiment is used. Thus, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 also functions as a movable body. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise about the center of the display area from the initial posture in which the upper and lower edges of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 are parallel to the horizontal direction. It is possible. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may not rotate, or both units may rotate. In this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot rotate. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 cannot rotate, as in the above embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may rotate or may not rotate.

FIG. 47F continuing from FIG. 47E shows a state in which the effect of the previous stage of the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has been started. In this example, before the main liquid crystal unit 1001 starts the rotation operation, after the variable icon, the hold icon, and the decorative design are displayed on the sub display device 1030, these displays are erased from the decorative design display device 208. .. In this example, first, after the black circular variable icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the variable icon is deleted from the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, when the hold icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, after the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. The display modes of the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 are the same as the display modes of the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 47(g) subsequent to FIG. 47(f) shows a state in which a decorative design is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The sub display device 1030 temporarily displays “decoration 2” as the left and right symbols, and after the middle symbols are variably displayed, the display of the decorative symbols is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the decorative pattern display device 208, when the display of the variable icon, the hold icon, the decorative pattern, and the like is deleted, another display that is overlapped with these displays may be visible to the player. The other display may be displayed as a notice image. When the other display becomes visible to the player, the pachinko machine 100 executes the special figure variation game that is being executed or is being held more than when the other display remains invisible to the player. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the big hit in the special figure variation game.

FIG. 47H subsequent to FIG. 47G shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has started the effect operation. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° from the initial posture.

FIG. 47(i) continuing from FIG. 47(h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated clockwise by 90° from the state shown in FIG. 47(h). Further, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and a white circular hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. ..

47(j) subsequent to FIG. 47(i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° from the state shown in FIG. 47(i) and returned to the initial posture. Further, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed as a middle symbol on the sub display device 1030, and the sub display is performed based on that the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command transmitted from the main control unit 300. On the device 1030, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol.

FIG. 47(k) subsequent to FIG. 47(j) shows a state in which the changing icon deletion animation is executed. On the sub display device 1030, the variation icon erasing animation is executed, and the variation icon of a black circle is erased.

FIG. 47(l) continuing from FIG. 47(k) shows a non-execution state of the special figure variation game. The special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is stopped and displayed, and the sub display device 1030 is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2."

FIG. 47(m) continuing from FIG. 47(l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon and a movement animation between the hold and variation icons that moves to the left is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Moreover, the movable body 1006 has moved to the leftmost end after the start of the special figure 1 variation game. Therefore, the movable body 1006 becomes invisible to the player.

FIG. 47(n) subsequent to FIG. 47(m) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 47(o) continuing from FIG. 47(n) shows a state in which the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted during the execution of the special symbol variation game that is the next to the special symbol variation game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has performed the rotation effect operation. After the variable display of the decorative design is started on the decorative design display device 208, the variable display of the decorative design is erased on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 47(n) subsequent to FIG. 47(o) shows a state in which the display of the variable icon is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the display of the variable icon and the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted during the execution of the special figure variation game that is the next to the special figure variation game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has performed the rotation effect operation. After the display of the variable icon on the decorative pattern display device 208 is started, the variable icon is erased on the sub display device 1030. When the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030 after the display of the hold icon on the decorative pattern display device 208 is started.

FIG. 47(q) continuing from FIG. 47(p) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a marginal result. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special display 1 variable display result is out of alignment. The movable body 1006 may be returned to the initial position after the end of the special figure 1 variation game.

FIG. 47(r) subsequent to FIG. 47(q) shows a state in which the variation icon deletion animation is executed during non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 shows an example of effects in Example 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 48 shows the effect state in time series. Each figure of FIG. 48 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 47(a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 48(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot move or rotate, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves up and down by the same drive mechanism as the movable body 1002 shown in FIG. It is possible. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate as in the case of the fifth embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 48A, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the initial position in the initial posture. Both the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be movable up and down.

FIG. 48(b) continuing from FIG. 48(a) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered off due to an electric power interruption during non-execution of the special figure variation game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 48C continuing from FIG. 48B shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. Similar to the movable body 1002, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves to the lowest position in the movement range by its own weight. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-off non-operation state. In addition, the second sub control unit 500 may execute drive control for moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 to the lowermost position by the power supplied from the power storage circuit provided in the power control unit 660.

FIG. 48D subsequent to FIG. 48C shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

FIG. 48E continuing from FIG. 48D shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 48(e), the first sub-control unit 400 is being activated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 display the character string image of “being activated”. Has been done.

FIG. 48F continuing from FIG. 48E shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed. The sub-display device 1030 continues to display the character string image of “starting up”.

FIG. 48(g) subsequent to FIG. 48(f) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body has started. In this example, only the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is executed. As shown in FIG. 48(g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves upward and is located at the initial position.

FIG. 48H subsequent to FIG. 48G shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° from the initial posture. FIG. 48I continuing from FIG. 48H shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 90° from the state shown in FIG. 48H. FIG. 48(j) subsequent to FIG. 48(i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° from the state shown in FIG. 48(i) and returned to the initial posture. In the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 of this example, first, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves from the lowermost position (non-operating operation position) to the initial position, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves counterclockwise from the initial position. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45°, then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 90° clockwise, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates counterclockwise 45°, returning to the initial posture. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is completed.

FIG. 48(k) subsequent to FIG. 48(j) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is resumed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. The stop pattern "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is the default stop pattern. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 48(k), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0.

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 shows an example of effects in Example 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 49 shows the effect state in time series. 49 shows the schematic front of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 49(a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Also,
In the state shown in FIG. 49(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can perform vertical movement and rotation operations, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can perform vertical movement and rotation operations. In the state shown in FIG. 49A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial position, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the initial position in the initial posture, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is initialized. It is stationary in a posture.

FIG. 49(b) continuing from FIG. 49(a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one.

FIG. 49(c) continuing from FIG. 49(b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon, and a movement animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 49(d) subsequent to FIG. 49(c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

FIG. 49(e) continuing from FIG. 49(d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach production is started after (e) in FIG.

FIG. 49(f) subsequent to FIG. 49(e) shows a state where the effect operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is started. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 30° from the initial posture.

49(g) subsequent to FIG. 49(f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by 60° from the state shown in FIG. 49(g).

FIG. 49(h) subsequent to FIG. 49(g) shows a state where the effect operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated clockwise by 30° from the initial posture.

49(i) subsequent to FIG. 49(h) shows a state where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated counterclockwise by 60° from the state shown in FIG. 49(h). The main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may start rotating at the same time, or one of them may come first. In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 have the same rotation speed.

FIG. 49(j) subsequent to FIG. 49(i) shows a state where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 49(h). In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and at the time point shown in FIG. 49(j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 49(i). The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 60°, and is rotated clockwise by 30° from the state shown in FIG. 49(i).

In FIG. 49(k) continued from FIG. 49(j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 60° from the state shown in FIG. 49(j), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is shown in FIG. 49(j).
It shows a state in which it has been rotated clockwise by 30° from the state shown in FIG. In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

In FIG. 49(l) continued from FIG. 49(k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise 30° from the state shown in FIG. 49(k), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 changes from the state shown in FIG. 49(k). It shows a state in which it is rotated counterclockwise by 30°. As a result, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 return to the initial posture.

FIG. 49(m) subsequent to FIG. 49(l) shows a state in which an effect operation is performed in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in the vertical direction. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves downward, and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves upward. Thus, in the effect operation of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in opposite directions.

FIG. 49(n) continuing from FIG. 49(m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. Further, before the end of the special figure 1 variation game, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are returned to the initial position. Moreover, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of line. "Decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is out of alignment.

FIG. 49(o) subsequent to FIG. 49(n) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the change icon is executed during the non-execution of the special figure change game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

(Example 8)
Next, the connection unit 1060 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A slip ring is used for the connection unit 1060 of this embodiment.

50A to 50D are external perspective views of the connection unit 1060 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as viewed from the front. First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1060 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1060 includes an upper case 1062 and a lower case 1064. The upper case 1062 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The upper case 1062 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Note that in FIGS. 50A to 50D and 50F, the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

A lower case 1064 is arranged below the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1064 is open. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1062 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1064 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1062 have the same size, and the lower case 1064 is arranged such that the upper surface thereof matches the lower surface of the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a shorter vertical length than the upper case 1062 when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Note that in FIGS. 50A to 50E, the lower case 1064 is hatched so as to rise to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1062 and the lower case 1064 are arranged on the moving unit 1036 side.

A fixed-side connector 1066 is provided in the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1062. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness, one end of which is connected to the fixed connector 1066, is connected to the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. The harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

A circular opening 1068 is provided in the center of the upper surface of the upper case 1062. A circular rotation side case 1070 is arranged in the opening 1068. The rotation side case 1070 is arranged on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. A rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided in the center of the rotation side case 1070. A direction in which a shaft having one end fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor arranged in the moving unit 1036 and the other end fixed to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is orthogonal to the upper surface of the rotation side case 1070 is fixed to the rotation shaft fixing hole 1072. Are arranged so as to be stretched. Further, the rotation side case 1070 is provided with a rotation side connector 1074. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness, one end of which is connected to the rotation side connector 1074, is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

The rotating case 1070 is adapted to rotate together with the shaft. 50(b) to (d) show a state in which the rotating case 1070 is rotated. FIG. 50B shows a state in which the rotating case 1070 is rotated 90° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 50A when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 50C shows a state in which the rotating case 1070 is rotated 180° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 50A when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 50(d) shows a state in which the rotating side case 1070 is rotated by 270° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 50(a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above.

FIG. 50E shows the inside of the lower case 1064 of the connection unit 1060 as viewed from the upper case 1062 side. A circular rotation shaft hole 1076 is provided in the center of the lower case 1064. A shaft for rotationally driving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 passes through the rotation shaft hole 1076.

Further, the fixed connector 1066 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1064 is provided with conductive parts 1078, 1080, 1082, 1084, 1086, 1088 which are connected to the pins of the fixed connector 1066, respectively. There is. Taking the conductive portion 1078 as an example, the conductive portion 1078 includes an elongated conductive plate 1078a and a fixture 1078b that fixes one end of the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064. The fixture 1078b fixes the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064 so that the conductive plate 1078b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixed portion 1078b. The conductive parts 1080 to 1088 have the same configuration as the conductive part 1078.

FIG. 50( f) shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the lower case 1064 side. A rotation side substrate 1090 is arranged on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070. The rotation side substrate 1090 is a slip ring. The rotation-side substrate 1090 has a circular shape and has a circular insulating portion 1092. Circular wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1092 of the rotation-side substrate 1090. The wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. The insulating portion 1092 and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are arranged concentrically, and a rotary shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. Note that, in FIG. 50F, the insulating portion 1092 and the wiring portions 1094 to 1104 are hatched in a right upward direction so that the configurations can be easily distinguished.

The rotation side connector 1074 of the rotation side case 1070 is provided with 6 pins, and each pin is connected to the wirings 1094 to 1104, respectively. The wiring 1094 is connected to the conductive portion 1078 shown in FIG. 50E, the wiring 1096 is connected to the conductive portion 1080 shown in FIG. 50E, and the wiring 1098 is connected to the conductive portion 1082 shown in FIG. 50E, the wiring 1102 is connected to the conductive portion 1086 shown in FIG. 50E, and the wiring 1104 is connected to the conductive portion 1088 shown in FIG. 50E. Connected with.

Next, the connection state between each conductive portion and each wiring will be described with reference to FIGS. 50G and 50H by taking the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 as an example. 50(g) and (h) show the conductive portion 1078 taken along the line AA of FIG. 50(e). The conductive plate 1078a has a shape that extends obliquely upward from the lower case 1064. When the lower case 1064 is placed on the upper case 1062 by aligning the upper surface of the lower case 1064 with the lower surface of the upper case 1062, the wiring 1094 causes the other end of the conductive plate 1078a to move downward as shown in FIG. It contacts the conductive plate 1078a so as to be pushed in. In this way, the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are connected. The same applies to the connection state between the conductive portions 1080 to 1088 and the wirings 1096 to 1104.

The conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1080 and the wiring 1096 are used to supply power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1082 and the wiring 1098 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1084 and the wiring 1100 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1086 and the wiring 1102 are used to transmit various signals from the first sub-board 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1088 and the wiring 1104 are used for transmitting various signals from the first sub-board 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

As an example of various signals, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer that controls an image control unit (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), the first sub control unit 400 sends a signal to the microcomputer. A production command (command for designating production, production progress, still image, moving image, progress of image display scenario, etc.) can be given.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be equipped with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided from the microcomputer to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is possible. An image command for the means (a command for designating the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) can be given.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or an image control means for controlling the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but these are mounted on the first sub-board 160 or the moving unit 1036. 1032 may be equipped with an image drive control means (a liquid crystal drive means or the like). In this case, the image drive control means (image drive control means (image drive control means) provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036 ( Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times/60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.) for liquid crystal driving means).

(Example 9)
Next, the connection unit of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the connection unit 1110 is used as the connection unit.

FIG. 51A is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 is arranged in the moving unit 1036 shown in FIG. 41, and is electrically connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1110 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1110 includes an upper case 1112 and a lower case 1114. The upper case 1112 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The upper case 1112 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. 51(a) and 51(c), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

A lower case 1114 is arranged below the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1114 is open. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1112 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1114 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1112 have the same size, and the lower case 1114 is arranged such that the upper surface thereof matches the lower surface of the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a shorter vertical length than the upper case 1112 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. Note that in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the lower case 1114 is hatched so as to rise to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations. The upper case 1112 and the lower case 1114 are arranged on the moving unit 1036 side.

A fixed-side connector 1116 is provided at the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1112. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness, one end of which is connected to the fixed connector 1116, is connected to the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. The harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

A circular opening 1118 is provided in the center of the upper bottom surface of the upper case 1112. A circular rotation side case 1120 is arranged in the opening 1118. The rotation side case 1120 is arranged on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. A rotation side connector 1022 is provided in the rotation side case 1120. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness, one end of which is connected to the rotation side connector 1122, is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

To the upper surface of the rotation side case 1112, columnar rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126, 1128 that are orthogonal to the upper surface and extend upward are fixed. The rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126, 1128 have the same length. Further, the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are arranged in the rotating case 1112 at equal intervals. Bearings are attached to the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124-1128, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is attached to the bearings. Further, connecting the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 forms an equilateral triangle, and the data transmitting/receiving units 1138 and 1144 described later are arranged at the center of gravity of the equilateral triangle.

FIG. 51B shows a state where the inside of the lower case 1114 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the upper case 1112 side. The fixed connector 1116 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1164 is provided with conductive parts 1130, 1132, 1134 and 1136 which are respectively connected to 4 pins of 6 pins of the fixed connector 1164. .. Taking the conductive portion 1130 as an example, the conductive portion 1130 includes an elongated conductive plate 1130a and a fixture 1130b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114. The fixture 1130b fixes the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114 so that the conductive plate 1130b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixed portion 1130b. The conductive parts 1132 to 1136 have the same configuration as the conductive part 1130.

Further, in this embodiment, the conductive parts 1130 to 1136 are used for power supply and GND connection, and signal communication is performed by optical communication (wireless communication). A data transmission/reception unit 1138 for optical communication is arranged in the center of the lower case 1114. The data transmission/reception unit 1138 is connected to two of the six pins of the fixed connector 1114. In this embodiment, the data transmitting/receiving unit 1138 is used for signal transmission, but it can also receive signals.

FIG. 51C shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the lower case 1114 side. A rotation side substrate 1140 is arranged on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120. The rotation side substrate 1140 is a slip ring. The rotation-side substrate 1140 has a circular shape and has a circular insulating portion 1142. A data transmitting/receiving unit 1144 is arranged at the center of the rotation side substrate 1140. The data transmission/reception unit 1144 is arranged to face the data transmission/reception unit 1138 so as to overlap the data transmission/reception unit 1138 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from above. Signal transmission/reception is performed between the data transmission/reception unit 1138 and the data transmission/reception unit 1144 by optical communication. The data transmitting/receiving unit 1144 is connected to two of the six pins of the rotation side connector 1122. In addition, in the present embodiment, the data transmission/reception unit 1144 is used for signal reception, but signal transmission is also possible.

Circular wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, 1152 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1142 of the rotation-side substrate 1140. The wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, 1152 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. Further, the insulating section 1142 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 are arranged concentrically, and the data transmitting/receiving section 1144 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. Note that in FIG. 51C, the insulating portion 1142 and the wiring portions 1146 to 1152 are hatched so as to rise to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

To the rotation side connector 1122 of the rotation side case 1120, 4 pins out of 6 pins and the wirings 1146 to 1152 are respectively connected. The wiring 1146 is connected to the conductive portion 1130 illustrated in FIG. 51B, the wiring 1148 is connected to the conductive portion 1132 illustrated in FIG. 51B, and the wiring 1150 is connected to the conductive portion 1134 illustrated in FIG. Then, the wiring 1152 is connected to the conductive portion 1136 shown in FIG.

51D and 51E show a connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146. 51D and 51E show the conductive portion 1130 taken along the line AA of FIG. 51B in an extracted manner. The connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 is similar to the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 shown in FIGS. The same applies to the connection state between the conductive parts 1132 to 1136 and the wirings 1148 to 1152.

The conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1132 and the wiring 1148 are used to supply power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1134 and the wiring 1150 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1136 and the wiring 1152 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160.

Further, as an example of various signals transmitted and received between the data transmission/reception units 1138 and 1144, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.). Is a production command (command for designating production, production progress, still image, moving image, progress of image display scenario, etc.) from the first sub-control unit 400 to the microcomputer.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be equipped with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided from the microcomputer to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is possible. An image command for the means (a command for designating the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) can be given.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or an image control means for controlling the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but these are mounted on the first sub-board 160 or the moving unit 1036. 1032 may be equipped with an image drive control means (a liquid crystal drive means or the like), and in this case, the image drive control means (image drive control means) provided from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036. Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times, such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.) for liquid crystal driving means).

In this embodiment, the data communication between the data transmitting/receiving units 1138 and 1144 is optical wireless communication. Laser light is used for optical wireless communication. Data communication between the data transmitting/receiving units 1138 and 1144 may be radio wave communication instead of optical wireless communication. Further, LED light may be used instead of laser light for optical wireless communication.
When both the data transmitting/receiving unit 1138 and the data transmitting/receiving unit 1144 are used for signal transmission/reception, the data transmitted from the data transmitting/receiving unit 1138 to the data transmitting/receiving unit 1144 is as described above, but the data transmitting/receiving unit 1144 transmits/receives data. For the unit 138, an ACK signal and a status signal from a control unit or the like provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 (for example, an image control unit, a microcomputer that controls the image control unit, an image driving unit (liquid crystal driving unit), or the like). , Information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (for example, a detection signal output when a sensor provided on the rotation side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side, an output signal of an encoder provided on the rotation side, etc. ) May be transmitted.

FIG. 51F is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment, as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has only the rotary body connection shaft 1124 as the rotary body connection shaft. The rotating body connecting shaft 1124 is arranged at the center (rotation center) of the rotating side case 1120.

FIG. 51G is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment, as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modified example has rotating body connecting shafts 1124 and 1126 as rotating body connecting shafts. A straight line connecting the tips of the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 passes through the center (rotation center) of the rotating side case 1120. Further, the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 are arranged at the same distance from the center.

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 shows Example 1 of effect in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 52 shows the effect state in time series. 52 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 40 or the movable body 1002. Further, the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 of the pachinko machine 100 of Example 10 of the present embodiment and Examples 11 to 16 described later are different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. And is movable in the left-right direction on the front side of the movable body 1002.

FIG. 52(a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 52(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Also, FIG.
In the state shown in 2(a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun is visible through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible through the transmissive portion 1006b.

FIG. 52(b) continuing from FIG. 52(a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice hold icon as shown in FIG.

FIG. 52(c) continuing from FIG. 52(b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon, and a movement animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 52(d) subsequent to FIG. 52(c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In and after FIG. 52, the variable display of the decorative design is represented by a downward thick white arrow. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative design is started after the start of the movement animation of the hold/change icon.

FIG. 52E continuing from FIG. 52D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is provisionally stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach production is started from FIG. 52(d).

In FIG. 52(f) continuing from FIG. 52(e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 moves to a position located in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Shows the state. FIG. 52( f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the right half region of the screens of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. The cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative pattern 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. In addition, a part of the region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. The yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. When the image of the yacht or the image of the cloud is shielded by the movable body 1008, compared to the case where the movable body 1008 is not shielded, there is a possibility that a big hit may occur in the special figure variation game being executed. Good.

52G shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transparent portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 52F, and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguished from other configurations. For this reason, hatching is added. Further, in FIGS. 52(h) to 52(k) continued from FIG. 52(g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008, the movable body 1008, and others are shown. The hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration. In FIG. 52(g), the image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. An image of the cloud is displayed below the transparent portion 1008b behind the movable body 1008, but the image of the cloud is not visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. Further, in this embodiment, the image of the cloud is an image displayed as a notice image.

FIG. 52H subsequent to FIGS. 52F and 52G shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 52(h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated about 10° counterclockwise.

FIG. 52(i) subsequent to FIG. 52(h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise by about 20° from the state shown in FIG. 52(h). Further, in FIG. 52(i), in the state of FIGS. 52(g) and 52(h), an image of a cloud that was invisible due to overlapping with the movable body 1008 is changed by the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. It shows a state in which it is visible through 1008b. In the pachinko machine 100, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates and the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate and the cloud image is not visually recognized through 1008b. Compared with, it may be configured to increase the probability of winning the big hit in the special figure variation game being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates counterclockwise by about 20° from the state shown in FIG. 52(h), so that the entire cloud image can be visually confirmed through 1008b. In some cases, only part of the cloud image may be visible via 1008b.

FIG. 52(j) subsequent to FIG. 52(i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 52(i). In FIG. 52(j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 52(j) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 52(h) are the same, but they are visually recognized through 1008b in the state shown in FIG. 52(h). Since the display of moving the cloud image which has not existed is moved upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 52(j). Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 52(j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. There may be a case where the moving display of the image is displayed.

52(k) subsequent to FIG. 52(j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has rotated clockwise about 10° from the state shown in FIG. 52(j) and has returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 52K, an image of a cloud which is not visually recognized through 1008b in the state shown in FIG. 52G is visually recognized through 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 52(k) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 52(g) are the same, but after the state shown in FIG. Since the display is made to move upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, it is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 52(k). Further, since the display of moving the image of the cloud upward is performed, the region of the cloud image visible through 1008b in FIG. 52(k) is visible through 1008b in FIG. 52(j). The area of the cloud image is larger than possible. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 52(k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. The moving image of the cloud may be displayed.

In FIG. 52(l) continuing from FIG. 52(k), after the movable body 1008 is moved to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Fig. 1 shows a state in which it is informed that the result of the variable display is a big hit.

FIG. 53 shows Example 2 of effect in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 53 shows the effect states in time series. 53 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 40 or a movable body 1002.

53(a) to (f) show the same states as FIGS. 52(a) to (f). FIG. 53(g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b which are extracted at the same timing as in FIG. 53(f), and the movable body 1008 can be easily distinguished from other configurations. For this reason, hatching is added. Further, in FIGS. 53(h) to 53(k) subsequent to FIG. 53(g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transparent portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008, the movable body 1008, The hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration. Further, FIG. 53(g) shows the same state as FIG. 52(g). FIG. 53(h) subsequent to FIGS. 53(f) and 53(g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation, and shows the same state as FIG. 52(h).

FIG. 53(i) subsequent to FIG. 53(h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 53(i). In FIG. 53(i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 52(i), the image of the cloud displayed behind the movable body 1008 is moved and displayed leftward as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. 1008b is not visible. Further, the cloud image may be erased with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, or may not be displayed from the beginning.

FIG. 53(j) subsequent to FIG. 53(i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 53(i). In FIG. 53(j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 52(j), the cloud image is not visually recognized.

FIG. 53(k) subsequent to FIG. 53(j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has rotated clockwise about 10° from the state shown in FIG. 53(j) and has returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 53(k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 52(k), the cloud image is not visually recognized.

In FIG. 53(l) continuing from FIG. 53(k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,;

As described above, in the effect of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may perform a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. In addition, the player may be able to visually recognize the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 through the transparent portion of the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. is there. Further, in the present embodiment, the image of the cloud displayed on the sub display device 1030, which becomes invisible by the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 moves to the left, is displayed as a notice image. In the present embodiment, the effect of allowing the player to visually recognize at least a part of the notice image through the transparent portion 1008b by the moving operation of the movable body 1008, and at least the notice image through the transparent portion 1008b. There is an effect in which some images are not made visible to the player. In addition, when a part of the notice image is visually recognized by the player through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008 by the moving operation of the movable body 1008, the notice image of the relevant notice is displayed through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. Compared to the case where at least a part of the images are not visually recognized by the player, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbols.

The images of clouds, balloons, and sun displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be able to be moved and displayed along with the movement of the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. For example, the image of the cloud displayed in the upper center of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 206 moves so that it becomes invisible through the transparent portion 1008a when the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position. The display may be performed, or the image of the balloon or the sun is moved so that the image can be visually confirmed through the transparent portion 1008a and the transparent portion 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position. It may be displayed. Further, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the pachinko machine 100 can transmit the transparent portion 1008a or the transparent portion 1008a to the transparent portion 1008a if the image of the cloud, the balloon, or the sun is visible. As compared with the case where the image of the cloud, the balloon, or the sun becomes invisible through the transmission unit 1008b, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed may be increased. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 performs moving display of the image of the cloud, balloon, or sun when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, and thereby the cloud, balloon, or sun is transmitted via the transparent portion 1008a or the transparent portion 1008b. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the moving image of the cloud, the balloon, or the sun is not displayed, so that the image of FIG. As compared with the case where the image of the cloud, balloon, or sun is visible, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed may be increased. Further, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, an image of a cloud, a balloon, or the sun, which is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a or the transmissive portion 1008b, is displayed in a color different from that in normal times. There may be cases. For example, when the cloud image is normally displayed in white and is viewed through the transmissive portion 1008a or the transmissive portion 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position, blue, green, or It may be displayed in red. When the cloud image is displayed in a color different from the normal time, the pachinko machine 100 wins the big hit in the special figure variation game being executed, as compared with the case where the cloud image is displayed in the normal color. It may be configured to have a higher probability of doing. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 52(g) to (k) of this embodiment or FIGS. 53(g) to (k) may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the sub display device 1030. It may be.

(Example 11)
FIG. 54 shows Example 1 of effect in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 54 shows the effect state in time series. 54 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 40 or the movable body 1002.

FIG. 54(a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 54(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 54(a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. Moreover, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun is visible through the transmissive part 1006a. Has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible through the transmissive portion 1006b.

FIG. 54(b) continuing from FIG. 54(a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice hold icon as shown in FIG.

FIG. 54C continuing from FIG. 54B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon, and a movement animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 54(d) continuing from FIG. 54(c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In and after FIG. 52, the variable display of the decorative design is represented by a downward thick white arrow. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative design is started after the start of the movement animation of the hold/change icon.

FIG. 54(e) continuing from FIG. 54(d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after (d) in FIG.

In FIG. 54(f) continuing from FIG. 54(e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 moves to the position located in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Shows the state. FIG. 54(f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the right half area of the screens of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize them. The cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative pattern 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. In addition, a part of the region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. The yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. When the image of the yacht or the image of the cloud is shielded by the movable body 1008, compared to the case where it is not shielded by the movable body 1008, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the special figure variation game being executed. There may be

FIG. 54(g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transparent portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as in FIG. 54(f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other configurations. For this reason, hatching is added. 54(g) to 54(h) to (k), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008, the movable body 1008, and the like. The hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration. In FIG. 54(g), the movable body 1008 shields the right part of the illumination unit 1014b, the lower end of the illumination unit 1014c, and a part of the illumination unit 1014d except for the right end thereof, and the illumination is performed via the transmissive unit 1008b. The portion of the portion 1014c excluding the shielded portion and the right end portion of the illumination portion 1014d are visually recognized. Further, FIG. 54(g) shows a state in which the illumination portions 1014a to 1014d visible to the player emit blue light. Further, in FIG. 54(g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b.

FIG. 54(h) subsequent to FIGS. 54(f) and 54(g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 54(h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by about 10°. Further, in FIG. 54(h), the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is reduced via the transmissive portion 1008b as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54(g). Further, in the unshielded region of the movable body 1008, the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is increased.

FIG. 54(i) following FIG. 54(h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise by about 35° from the state shown in FIG. 54(h). In FIG. 54(i), the black-painted portion of the illuminating section 1014d indicates the portion emitting blue light, and the white-painted portion indicates the portion emitting red light. In FIG. 54(i), in the region not shielded by the movable body 1008, a portion of the illumination unit 1014d which is not visually recognized by the player by overlapping with the movable body 1008 and which emits red light can be visually recognized by the player. It shows the state of becoming. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated to make the red light emitting portion visible, the red liquid emitting portion is not visible because the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. As compared with the case where it does not occur, it may be configured to increase the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed.

FIG. 54(j) subsequent to FIG. 54(i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 35° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 54(i). Further, FIG. 54(j) shows a state in which the area of the portion of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is large and the area of the portion that emits blue light is small. In FIG. 54(j), a part of the cloud image as the notice image is visually recognized via 1008b. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 52(j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. The image may be displayed in some cases. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when at least a part of the image of the cloud as the notice image is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the notice is transmitted through the transmissive portion 1008b. As compared with the case where at least a part of the image of the cloud as the image is not visually recognized, it may be configured to increase the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed.

FIG. 54(k) following FIG. 54(j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has rotated clockwise about 10° from the state shown in FIG. 54(j) and has returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 54(k) shows a state in which the area of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is further increased, and the illuminating portion 1014d emits all red light. In FIG. 54(k), a part of the cloud image as the notice image is visually recognized via 1008b. In addition, since the display for moving the cloud image upward is performed, the region of the cloud image visible through 1008b in FIG. 54(k) is visible through 1008b in FIG. 54(j). The area of the cloud image is larger than possible. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 54(k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. The moving image of the cloud may be displayed.

In FIG. 54(l) continuing from FIG. 54(k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Fig. 1 shows a state in which it is informed that the result of the variable display is a big hit.

55 shows production example 2 in example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 55 shows the effect state in time series. 55 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 40 or the movable body 1002.

55(a) to (f) show the same states as FIGS. 54(a) to (f). FIG. 55(g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 55(f) in an extracted manner, so that the movable body 1008 can be easily distinguished from other configurations. For this reason, hatching is added. Further, in FIGS. 55(h) to (k) continued from FIG. 55(g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008, the movable body 1008, and others are shown. The hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration. Also, FIG. 55(g) shows the same state as FIG. 54(g). 55(h) subsequent to FIGS. 55(f) and 55(g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation, and shows the same state as FIG. 54(h).

FIG. 55(i) subsequent to FIG. 55(h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 55(i). Further, in FIG. 55(i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 54(i), since the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is small, it overlaps with the movable body 1008 so that the illumination unit 1014d is red and is not visually recognized by the player. It shows a state where the light emitting portion is not visually recognized.

FIG. 55(j) subsequent to FIG. 55(i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 55(i). Further, in FIG. 55(j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 54(j), the area of the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits red light is not large, so the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits red light is visible. Not showing the state. Also, in FIG. 55(j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 54(j), a state in which the cloud image as the advance notice image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

FIG. 55(k) subsequent to FIG. 55(j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has rotated clockwise about 10° from the state shown in FIG. 55(j) and has returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 55(k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 54(j), since the area of the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits red light is not large, the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits red light is not visible. Shows the state. Also, in FIG. 55(k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 54(j), a state in which the cloud image as the advance notice image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

55(l) continued from FIG. 55(k), after the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,;

As described above, in the effect of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may perform a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 causes the illumination unit to rotate. The light emission mode of 1014d may change. In the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by up to 45° in the clockwise direction behind the movable body 1008, the lighting mode of the illumination unit 1014d is changed, and the sub liquid crystal is behind the movable body 1008. When the unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by a maximum of 30°, an effect in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change is performed. In the pachinko machine 100, when the light emitting mode of the illuminating unit 1014d changes due to the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008, the pachinko machine 100 is in execution as compared with the case where the light emitting mode of the illuminating unit 1014d does not change. It may be configured to increase the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game.

(Example 12)
FIG. 56 shows an example of effects in Example 12 of the present exemplary embodiment. FIG. 56 shows the effect state in time series. 56 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 56(a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 56( a ), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 56(a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun is visible through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible through the transmissive portion 1006b.

FIG. 56(b) continuing from FIG. 56(a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice hold icon as shown in FIG.

FIG. 56(c) continuing from FIG. 56(b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon, and a movement animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 56(d) continuing from FIG. 56(c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

FIG. 56E continuing from FIG. 56D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach production is started from FIG. 56(d).

56F continuing from FIG. 56E, the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the state shown in FIG. 56E, and the left end of the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008 is the screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows a state in which it has moved to a position located at the left end. FIG. 56F shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see the center. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative pattern 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. In addition, the display area of the sub display device 1030 and the illumination unit 1014d are visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. Further, the image of the yacht and the image of the cloud displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b.

FIG. 56(g) continuing from FIG. 56(f) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and hidden by the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 56(g), a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008 displays a cloud image as a notice image. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, it is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. As compared with the case where the effect is not performed, it may be configured to increase the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed.

56H continuing from FIG. 56G, behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state of FIG. 56G, and through the transmissive portion 1008b. , Shows a state in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized. FIG. 56(h) shows a state in which a cloud image as a notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b.

FIG. 56(i) continuing from FIG. 56(h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state in FIG. 56(h). FIG. 56(i) shows a state in which a cloud image as a notice image displayed on the right side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b.

FIG. 56(j) continuing from FIG. 56(i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has moved upward from the state of FIG. 56(i) behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 56(j) shows a state in which the cloud image as the advance notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 which has been visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b cannot be visually recognized.

FIG. 56K continuing from FIG. 56J shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45° clockwise from the initial posture behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 56(k) shows a state in which a cloud image as a notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 56(k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated in a state where the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008, so that the light is transmitted through the transmissive portion 1008b. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized is changed. Further, the image of the cloud is moved and displayed upward from the state shown in FIG. 56(i).

56(l) following FIG. 56(k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45° clockwise (a total of 90°) from the state shown in FIG. 56(k) behind the movable body 1008. It has been rotated). FIG. 56(l) shows a state in which a cloud image as a notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 56(l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated while the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008, so that the light is transmitted through the transmissive portion 1008b. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized is changed.

56(m) continued from FIG. 56(l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 110° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56(l) behind the movable body 1008 (200° in total). It has been rotated). FIG. 56(m) shows a state in which the cloud image as the notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized via the transmissive unit 1008b.

56(n) continuing from FIG. 56(m), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated clockwise by 160° from the state shown in FIG. 56(l) (total 360°). It has rotated and has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 56(m) shows a state in which the cloud image as the notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized via the transmissive unit 1008b.

In FIG. 56(o) continued from FIG. 56(n), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 56(o) behind the movable body 1008 and returned to the initial position. It shows the state of being. FIG. 56( o) shows a state in which a cloud image as a notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmissive unit 1008 b.

FIG. 56P continuing from FIG. 56O shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 56O and returned to the initial position. FIG. 56(p) shows a state in which the effect operation of each movable body (movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012) is completed.

FIG. 56(q) continuing from FIG. 56(p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 visually recognized by the player through the transmissive portion 1008b of the movable body 1008 by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008. The amount of an image (for example, an image of a cloud as a notice image) may be configured to change, and the amount of the image in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 visually recognized by the player via the transmissive portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. It may be configured to increase the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed, as compared with the case where does not change. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform the moving and rotating operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 13)
FIG. 57 shows an example of effects in Example 13 of the present embodiment. FIG. 57 shows the effect state in time series. 57 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 57(a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 57A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. Moreover, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun is visible through the transmissive part 1006a. Has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible through the transmissive portion 1006b. Further, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and another part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, the sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

FIG. 57(b) continuing from FIG. 57(a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice hold icon as shown in FIG. Further, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 1030. When the same character image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time, compared to the case where the same character image is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time, the special character being executed is different. There is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the figure variation game.

FIG. 57(c) continuing from FIG. 57(b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon and a moving animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 57(d) continuing from FIG. 57(c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

FIG. 57(e) continuing from FIG. 57(d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach production is started after (d) in FIG.

57(f) following FIG. 57(e) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Is shown. FIG. 57( f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative pattern 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. FIG. 57F shows a state where the image of the balloon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

In FIG. 57F continuing from FIG. 57F, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and hidden by the movable body 1008, and the sub display device 1030. The image of the balloon displayed in and the image of the yacht are invisible. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, it is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. As compared with the case where the effect is not performed, it may be configured to increase the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed.

57(h) subsequent to FIG. 57(g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 57(g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. In FIG. 57(h), the image of the balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visible through the transmissive portion 1008b, and the image of the yacht is invisible because it overlaps with the movable body 1008.

57(i) following FIG. 57(h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state in FIG. 57(h). 57(i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 240° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 57(h) behind the movable body 1008 (a total of 300° rotation). ing. Further, in FIG. 57(i), an image of a part of the balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized in a region not shielded by the movable body 1008, and an image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030. Indicates a state in which the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008.

57(j) following FIG. 57(i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state in FIG. 57(i). Further, FIG. 57(j) shows an operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60° counterclockwise (a total of 360° rotation) from the state of FIG. 57(g) behind the movable body 1008. Both of the operations of moving to the lower initial position are performed in parallel, and the state is shown in which the initial posture and the initial position are restored. Further, FIG. 57(j) shows a state in which both the balloon image and the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 have been deleted.

FIG. 57(k) continuing from FIG. 57(j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 57(j) and returned to the initial position.

FIG. 57(l) continuing from FIG. 57(k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a marginal result. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special display 1 variable display result is out of alignment.

As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a certain position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. Of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the image is configured to be invisible to the player and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only one character image is configured to be visible to the player. Further, in the case where the one character image that is visible at that time is a specific character image (for example, a notice image), the specific character image that is visible at that time is not a specific character image. Compared with the case where there is not, there is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed. In addition, one of the character images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. Therefore, it may be visible. One of the character images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. If visible, compared to the case in which both movable bodies 1006 and 1008 cannot be seen even if the movable bodies perform a moving operation, the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed is high. There may be In addition, one of the character images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. In the case where it is visible, compared to the case where both the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 cannot be visually recognized because the movable bodies do not perform the moving operation, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed. There may be cases where In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform vertical movement and rotation operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 14)
FIG. 58 shows an example of effects in Example 14 of the present embodiment. FIG. 58 shows the effect state in time series. 58 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 of Example 14 of the present embodiment and Examples 15 and 16 described later are different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. ..

FIG. 58(a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 58(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 58A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 101.
0 and 1012 are located at the initial position. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun is visible through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible through the transmissive portion 1006b. Further, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and another part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 58B continuing from FIG. 58A shows a state in which the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal holding icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 is 1. Further, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 1030. When the same character image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time, compared with the case where the same character image is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time, the special character being executed is displayed. There is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the figure variation game.

58(c) following FIG. 58(b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Further, on the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon and a movement animation between the hold/variation icons that moves to the left is started. Further, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon is erased.

FIG. 58(d) subsequent to FIG. 58(c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, FIG. 58D shows a state in which, on the sub-display device 1030, the hold icon becomes the change icon after the special game 1 change game is started, and the move animation between the hold/change icons that moves to the left ends. ing.

FIG. 58E continuing from FIG. 58D shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started from FIG. 58(d) onward.

In FIG. 58F continuing from FIG. 58E, the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 is at a position where the fluctuation icon on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden. It shows a moved state. FIG. 58( f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative pattern 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. FIG. 58F shows a state in which the variable icon displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap each other, and thus the variable icon cannot be visually recognized. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

58(g) following FIG. 58(f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state in FIG. 58(f). Further, in FIG. 58G, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008, hidden by the movable body 1008, and displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon and the image of the yacht are not visible. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, it is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. As compared with the case where the effect is not performed, it may be configured to increase the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed.

FIG. 58H subsequent to FIG. 58G shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 58G behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, FIG. 58(h) shows a state in which an image of the balloon is displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the image of the balloon is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. Further, in FIG. 58(h), the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 causes the change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 to change from the normal mode (white circle) to the advance mode (white diamond). , A state in which the change icon in the advance notice mode is visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b. In the effect of this embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize the change icon of the normal mode changing to the notice mode via the transmissive portion 1008b. In some cases, the player may visually recognize the change icon in the normal mode after the change icon is changed to the notice mode.

FIG. 58I continuing from FIG. 58H shows a state in which the movable body 1008 rotates counterclockwise by 200° (a total of 360° rotation) from the state of FIG. 58H, and returns to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 58( i) shows a state where the image of the balloon, the image of the yacht, and the change icon of the notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized.

58(j) following FIG. 58(i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 58(i) and has returned to the initial position. Further, FIG. 58(j) shows a state in which the change icon in the notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b. Further, in FIG. 58(j), the image of the yacht and the image of the balloon are not visible on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 58(k) following FIG. 58(j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 58(j) and returned to the initial position.

FIG. 58(l) continued from FIG. 58(k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is a big hit.

As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, a variation icon, and a hold icon may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a certain position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. The image, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the player cannot see them, and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only one of the plurality of character images and the variable icon are configured to be visible to the player. In addition, if one of the character images that has become visible at that time is a specific character image (for example, a notice image), or if the change icon is in a notice mode, it is visually confirmed at that time. Even if there is a possibility that the one special character image that is enabled is not a specific character image and the variation icon is not in the notice mode, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed. Good. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, whereby all the character images of the plurality of character images, the variation icon, And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, and the variable icon There may be a case where only the player can see only the hold icon, and there is a case where the player can see only the hold icon.

Further, one of the character images and the variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates the moving motion of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. It may be possible to be visually recognized by performing. One of the character images and the variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 performs the moving operation of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Therefore, if visible, compared to the case in which both movable bodies 1006 and 1008 cannot be seen even if the movable bodies perform a moving operation, there is a possibility that a big hit will occur in the special figure variation game being executed. It may be higher. Further, one of the character images and the variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates the moving motion of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. By performing, when it is visible, compared to the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be seen because the movable body does not perform the moving operation, it can be a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed. There is a case where the property becomes high. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform vertical movement and rotation operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 15)
FIG. 59 shows an example of effects in Example 15 of the present embodiment. FIG. 59 shows the effect state in time series. 59 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 59(a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 59(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 59A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. Moreover, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun is visible through the transmissive part 1006a. Has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible through the transmissive portion 1006b. Further, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and another part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, the sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

FIG. 59(b) continuing from FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal holding icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 is 1. Further, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 1030. When the same character image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time, compared with the case where the same character image is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time, the special character being executed is displayed. There is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the figure variation game.

59 (c) which continues from FIG. 59 (b) has shown the state where the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212 not shown has started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon, and a movement animation between the hold and variation icons that moves to the left has been started. Further, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon is erased.

FIG. 59(d) subsequent to FIG. 59(c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, FIG. 59(d) shows a state in which, on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon becomes the change icon after the special game 1 change game is started and moves to the left, and the movement animation between the hold/change icons is completed. ing. Further, FIG. 59(d) shows a state in which the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal holding icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 is 1.

FIG. 59(e) continuing from FIG. 59(d) shows a state where "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach production is started from FIG. 59(d) onward.

In FIG. 59(f) continuing from FIG. 59(e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden. It shows the state of being. FIG. 59( f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative patterns 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. FIG. 59F shows a state where the hold icon cannot be visually recognized because the hold icon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap each other. Further, the variable icon displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized in a region that is not shielded by the movable body 1008.

59(g) subsequent to FIG. 59(f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state in FIG. 59(f). Further, in FIG. 59G, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008, hidden by the movable body 1008, and displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon, the hold icon, and the yacht image are invisible. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, it is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. As compared with the case where the effect is not performed, it may be configured to increase the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed.

FIG. 59H continuing from FIG. 59G shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 58G behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 59(h), the holding operation displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white diamond) by the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. However, the change icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode are visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. In the effect of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize, through the transmissive portion 1008b, that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the prefetching notice mode. However, the player may visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the change to the pre-reading notice mode.

FIG. 59(i) continuing from FIG. 59(h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 rotates counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 59(h) by 300° (a total of 360° rotation) and returns to the initial posture. There is. Further, in FIG. 59(i), the image of the balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030, the image of the yacht, the change icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the prefetching notice mode are visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008. It shows that it cannot be done.

59(j) following FIG. 59(i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 59(i) and has returned to the initial position. In addition, in FIG. 59(j), the variation icon in the normal mode and the variation icon in the advance notice displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 59(j), the image of the yacht is invisible on the sub display device 1030.

59(k) subsequent to FIG. 59(j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 59(j) and returned to the initial position.

FIG. 59(l) continuing from FIG. 59(k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a marginal result. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special display 1 variable display result is out of alignment.

FIG. 59(m) continuing from FIG. 59(l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon, and a movement animation between the hold and variation icons that moves to the left has been started.

59(n) continued from FIG. 59(m), in the sub-display device 1030, after the special figure 1 variation game is started, the hold icon becomes a variation icon and moves to the left. It shows the finished state. Further, FIG. 59(n) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. A predetermined reach effect is started after FIG. 59(n).

FIG. 59(o) continuing from FIG. 59(n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished after the predetermined reach effect is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is a big hit. In this way, the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the look-ahead notice mode is finally more than the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the normal mode. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is easily confirmed and displayed.

As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, a variation icon, and a hold icon may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a certain position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. The image, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the player cannot see them, and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008. Only the floating icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. In addition, when the hold icon that is visible at that time is in the look-ahead notice mode, the hold corresponding to the hold icon is compared to when the hold icon that is visible at that time is not the look-ahead notice mode. There is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game which is started after being digested. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, whereby all the character images of the plurality of character images, the variation icon, And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, and the variable icon There may be a case where only the player can see only the hold icon, and there is a case where the player can see only the hold icon.

Further, the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving operation of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Therefore, it may be visible. The movable icon and the hold icon, which are displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, are moved by both of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. If visible, compared with the case where both movable bodies 1006 and 1008 cannot be seen even if the movable bodies perform a moving operation, the special figure variation game being executed or the target of the relevant hold icon is held. There is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game started by being digested. Further, the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving operation of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Therefore, when visible, compared with the case where both movable bodies 1006 and 1008 cannot be visually recognized because the movable body does not perform the moving operation, the special figure variation game being executed or the target of the hold icon is executed. There is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game that is started when the hold is digested. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform vertical movement and rotation operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 16)
FIG. 60 shows an example of effects in Example 16 of the present embodiment. FIG. 60 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 60 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 60A shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 60(a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 60A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. Further, the movable symbol 1006 is used to display the decorative pattern display device 208.
A part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden, and another part of the image of the sun is visible through the transmissive portion 1006a. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible through the transmissive portion 1006b. Further, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and another part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 60(b) continuing from FIG. 60(a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal holding icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 is 1. Further, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 1030. When the same character image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time, compared with the case where the same character image is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time, the special character being executed is displayed. There is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the figure variation game.

FIG. 60(c) which continues from FIG. 60(b) has shown the state where the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212 not shown has started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon, and a movement animation between the hold and variation icons that moves to the left has been started. Further, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon is erased.

FIG. 60D subsequent to FIG. 60C shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, FIG. 60D shows a state in which, on the sub-display device 1030, the hold icon becomes a change icon after the special game 1 change game is started, and the move animation between the hold/change icons that moves to the left is completed. ing.

FIG. 60E continuing from FIG. 60D shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started from FIG. 60(d) onward.

FIG. 60(f) continuing from FIG. 60(e) shows a state where the number of holdings of special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal holding icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 is 1. Further, in FIG. 60( f ), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the variation icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008 b of the movable body 1008. It shows a state in which it has been moved to a position. Further, FIG. 60F shows a state in which the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shielded by the movable body 1008 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative patterns 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b.

60G continuing from FIG. 60F, behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and is hidden by the movable body 1008, and the sub display device 1030. The variable icon, the hold icon, and the image of the yacht displayed in are not visible. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, it is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. As compared with the case where the effect is not performed, it may be configured to increase the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed.

FIG. 60H continuing from FIG. 60G shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 58G behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 59(h), the holding operation displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white diamond) by the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. However, the change icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode are visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. In the effect of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize, through the transmissive portion 1008b, that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the prefetching notice mode. However, the player may visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the change to the pre-reading notice mode.

FIG. 60I continuing from FIG. 60H shows a state in which the movable body 1008 rotates counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 60H by 300° (a total of 360° rotation) and returns to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 60(i) shows a state in which the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030, the change icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized. ing.

FIG. 60(j) subsequent to FIG. 60(i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 60(i) and has returned to the initial position. Further, on the sub display device 1030, an image simulating a button, a character string image of “push” above it, and a meter image displaying the effective period of pressing the button are displayed overlapping the hold icon. There is. In addition, the hold icon in the pre-reading advance notice mode may change to an image simulating a button or the like. Further, FIG. 60(j) shows a state in which a variable icon, an image simulating a button, and a character string image of “push” above the variable icon are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b, and the meter image is the movable body 1008. It is hidden and hidden from view. Further, in FIG. 60(j), the image of the yacht is invisible on the sub display device 1030.

In FIG. 60(k) that follows FIG. 60(j), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the state of FIG. 60(j), and the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a. This shows a possible state. Further, FIG. 60K shows a state in which the character string image of “push” displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a. Further, the variable icon, the button-like image, and the meter image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are hidden by the movable body 1008 and thus are invisible. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmissive unit 1008a, the pachinko machine 100 in the currently running state is compared to when the screen of the sub display device 1030 is not visually recognized. It may be configured so that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the figure variation game.

FIG. 60L continuing from FIG. 60K shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, on the sub-display device 1030, the character string image of “push” is deleted based on the player's pressing of the chance button 136, and the effect image is displayed in the image simulating the button and the periphery thereof. Further, FIG. 60(l) shows a state where the effect image is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b.

FIG. 60(m) subsequent to FIG. 60(l) shows the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 as shown in FIG. The state of moving from the state of to the uppermost position is shown. Further, in FIG. 60(m), a part of the button image and the effect image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a.

FIG. 60(n) continuing from FIG. 60(m) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 60(m) and returned to the initial position. In addition, the sub display device 1030 displays a variable icon, a button image, and an effect image.

In FIG. 60O continuing from FIG. 60N, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is executed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The state is shown. FIG. 60O shows the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotated counterclockwise by 60° from the state of FIG. 60N.

In FIG. 60P continuing from FIG. 60O, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 60O by 300° (a total of 360° rotation) to return to the initial posture. After that, the state is shown in which it is returned to the lower initial position. Further, the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 executed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 includes both the operation of rotating counterclockwise and the operation of moving to the lower initial position in parallel. It may be possible to return to the initial posture and initial position.

FIG. 60(q) subsequent to FIG. 60(p) shows a state in which the button image and the effect image are erased and the fluctuating icon in the normal state is changed to the fluctuating icon in the notice mode on the sub display device 1030. Moreover, FIG. 60 (q) has shown the state where the special figure 1 variation game was completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is a big hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated based on the pressing of the chance button 136 during the change of the symbol, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily in the symbol variation than when the rotating operation is not performed.

As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may display a plurality of character images, a change icon, a hold icon, and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a certain position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the character images of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. , The change icon, the hold icon, and the image prompting the player to press the chance button 136 are not visible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008, In some cases, only the variable icon displayed on the display device 1030 and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 are configured to be visible to the player. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, whereby all the character images of the plurality of character images, the variation icon, There may be a case where the player can visually recognize the hold icon and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the player can only view the hold icon and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. In some cases, the player may be able to see only the variable icon, or in some cases only the hold icon is visible to the player. Alternatively, the player may be able to visually recognize only the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136.

In addition, an image prompting the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136, which is displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, is displayed on the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. There may be a case where both movable bodies become visible by performing a moving operation. An image that prompts the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136, which is displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, to prompt both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 to be pressed. When the movable body can be visually recognized by performing the moving operation, compared to the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot visually recognize even if the movable body performs the moving operation, the special figure variation game being executed or There is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game that is started when the suspension of the target of the suspension icon is exhausted. In addition, an image prompting the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136, which is displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, is displayed on the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. When both of the movable bodies can be visually recognized by performing the moving operation, compared to the case where both of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 cannot be visually recognized by not performing the moving operation, the special figure fluctuation in execution There is a possibility that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game started when the game or the hold of the target of the hold icon is exhausted. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform vertical movement and rotation operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 17)
An example of effects on the sub display device 1030 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. In addition, in FIG. 61 and each drawing described later, an example of the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in each embodiment is shown in time series. In addition, the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030 is represented by a thick white arrow. In the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 described later is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. The other effect may be, for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character without displaying a decorative pattern, or an effect of displaying a decorative pattern and displaying a predetermined background or character. Good. Further, in the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is being executed, the decorative symbol display device 208 may execute the same effect as the effect of the sub display device 1030.

First, common points between FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 described later will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 61A, a decoration frame F1 having a shape in which the letter “L” is vertically inverted is displayed in the upper left portion in the display area of the sub display device 1030. A square-shaped special figure 1 reserved number display area 1931 is provided in the upper left portion of the decorative frame F1, and a square special figure 2 reserved number display area 1932 is provided on the right side of the decorative frame F1. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 is provided below 1931, and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934 is provided below it. In the special figure 1 pending number display area 1931, the number of pending figures of the special figure 1 is displayed by numbers, for example, “0” is displayed when there is no pending of the special figure 1. In the special figure 2 pending number display area 1932, the number of pending figures in the special figure 2 is displayed by numbers, and, for example, “0” is displayed when there is no pending figure in the special figure 2. Further, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, when the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, "/" which notifies that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed as a variation display of the fourth symbol , "\" images are displayed alternately, and the special figure 1 variation game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped and displayed), "-" or "○" as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" is the fourth symbol which is displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out, and "○" is the fourth symbol which is displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variation game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 1 variation game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, when the special figure 2 variation game is being executed, "/" which notifies that the special figure 2 variation game is being executed as a variation display of the fourth symbol , "\" images are displayed alternately, and the special figure 2 variation game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped and displayed), "-" or "○" as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of alignment, and "○" is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variation game.

A horizontally long rectangular decorative frame F2 is displayed below the display area of the sub display device 1030. In the center of the decorative frame F2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 1940 in which left and right frames are partially opened is provided. The variable icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 1930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variable icon and the hold icon.

A special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 1940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 1940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is roughly divided from the left to the right into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reservation orders of special figure 1, respectively. That is, the special area 1 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) special area 1 hold icon can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the special area 1 hold icon is displayed in the second to fourth areas. ~ The special figure 1 reservation icon corresponding to the reservation of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is roughly divided from the left to the right into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the holding order of the first to fourth special maps 2, respectively. That is, in the first area, the special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the earliest (oldest stored) special figure 2 can be displayed, and similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon is displayed in the second to fourth areas. ~ The special figure 2 reservation icon corresponding to the reservation of the fourth special figure 2 can be displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960, various animations representing the movement of the hold icon are executed.

A square-shaped navigation character display area 1970 is provided on the left of the special figure 1 reserved display area 1950. A character image H1 of a merchant is displayed in the navigation character display area 1970. The character image H1 of the merchant is used for an explanation effect such as a tutorial effect or a notice (a notice of the change or a look-ahead notice).

To the right of the special figure 2 hold display area 1960, a square effect custom state display area 1980 is provided. In the effect custom state display area 1980, “levels 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 1000. The level of the effect custom state is set to increase, for example, when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed. In addition, the level of the effect custom state may be set so as to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big hit is won.

FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the winning/decision result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order is stopped and displayed. ing. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 1933, the 4th symbol of the display mode of "-" which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 1931, and the number of reservations of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 1932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

FIG. 61(b) shows that the suspension of the special figure 1 has been exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 1931, and it is informed that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0.

In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 1940 and the special figure 1 suspension icon display area 1950 of the sub display device 1030, between the hold and variation icons. The moving animation of is executed. In the movement animation between the hold/variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 becomes the change icon 1941 and moves to the change icon display area 1940. .. The right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon 1941 in FIG. 61B indicates the moving direction of the variation icon 1941.

In FIG. 61( c ), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a of the sub display device 1030, the moving animation between the hold/variable icons ends, and the variation icon 1941 is displayed in the variation icon display area 1940. The displayed state is shown. Also, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and white is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950. The default special figure 1 hold icon 1952 displayed in a circle is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 in FIG. 61B indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952. In FIG. 61(c), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 1030d. The balloon image is an image used for advance notice by the character image H1 of the merchant.

FIG. 61(d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 1953 displayed in a circle is shown in a state where the hold icon appears in an increasing animation. The up arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 in FIG. 61D indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953. In addition, an image of a character string of "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and an effect is expected to be developed to reach effect. In addition, a substantially rectangular hold change image H2 including the image of the character string of "hold change" is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b and the right symbol display area 1030c. .. The hold change image H2 is an image displayed to notify that a pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the displayed hold icon or variable icon or an effect of the notice of the change is executed. In this example, the hold change image H2 notifies that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed changes is executed. In addition, the hold change image H2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is changed. It may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is changed. The display may appear only when the hold icon and the variable icon of special figure 2 are changed, or may appear only when the hold icon of special figure 1, the hold icon of special figure 2, and the variable icon are changed. It may be a display.

In FIG. 61(e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game may be out of order. This shows the informed state. Further, a deletion animation in which the fluctuation icon 1941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 1940 moves downward is displayed, and the fluctuation icon 1941 is gradually deleted. In addition, FIG. 61E shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of lightning strike is displayed from the pending change image H2 to the special figure 1 hold icon 1952, and an effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 1951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special figure 1 hold icons 1952 and 1953, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon 1952 and part of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are hidden by the effect image.

FIG. 61(f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" indicating that the winning/decision result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order is stopped and displayed. ing. Further, in FIG. 61(f), the change animation ends, the hold change image H2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 61(e) are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from white circle to black circle. Is changing.

FIG. 61(g) shows that the first special figure 1 has been reserved and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 becomes a variable icon, and a moving animation between the hold/change icons and a special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are started. ing. Further, in FIG. 61(g), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 1030d.

FIG. 61(h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold/fluctuation icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 61(h), an image of a character string of "donor" is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the character image H1 of the merchant, suggesting that a character image H3 of the tongue, which will be described later, appears. The production is being executed. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27(b) (hereinafter, also referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 61(i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030. Further, the character image H3 of the lord is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 1030d, and the image of the character string "Called?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the lord. In addition, an image of the character string “Den!” is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant.

FIG. 61(j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

FIG. 61K shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 rotated by 45° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b are also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Further, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b are also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 61K shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 compressed in the longitudinal direction due to the problem of space on the paper surface.

FIG. 61(l) shows that the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 61(k) (total 90° rotation). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. The images displayed on the sub display device 1030 before rotation of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 61(j) and (k) have an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208). ), the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 61(l) has an aspect ratio of 1:1. It is displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 rotated counterclockwise by 90° takes the horizontal axis in the direction rotated 90° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and is orthogonal to the horizontal axis. It is the aspect ratio when the vertical axis is taken as the direction. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 after rotation is the horizontal axis in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. Is the aspect ratio of the case.

FIG. 61(m) shows that the sub display device 1030 is rotated 90° counterclockwise (180° in total) when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 61(k). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. The aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed to the aspect ratio before rotation.

FIG. 61(n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display region of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 61(m) (total 225° rotation). Showing. Further, in FIG. 61(n), the pending change image H2 during the execution of the rotation display notice effect overlaps the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the hall. Will be displayed. The pending change image H2 displayed in FIG. 61(n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Note that, although FIG. 61(n) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed manner due to the problem of space on the paper surface, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has not changed.

FIG. 61( o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° (rotation by 270° in total) about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 61(n). In addition, FIG. 61( o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect, a display that a thunder is generated is displayed from the pending change image H2, and an animation of a lightning strike on the variable icon displayed in a black circle is executed. The variable icon having a lightning strike overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 61(o), "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. It shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area of 1950 appears by the increase animation of the hold icon. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 954 is enlarged and displayed as compared with other hold icons. Therefore, it may be possible for the player to pay attention to the enlarged and displayed hold icon during execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that, although FIG. 61(n) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed manner due to the problem of space on the paper surface, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has not changed.

FIG. 61(p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 61(o) (total 315° rotation). In addition, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 61(o) and the effect image displayed by overlapping the entire variation icon 1941 are deleted, and the character "heat" is drawn in a circle. The variable icon is enlarged and displayed. Therefore, it may be possible for the player to pay attention to the enlarged and displayed variable icon during execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that, although FIG. 61(n) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed manner due to the problem of space on the paper surface, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has not changed. Next, in FIG. 61(q), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. It shows a state in which 1030 has rotated once and returned to the original state. In addition, the hold icon and the variable icon that have been enlarged and displayed have returned to the normal size. Next, in FIG. 61(r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. This indicates a state in which the fact is notified. Further, the moving icon displayed in the moving icon display area 1940 is moved downward, so that a deleting animation for deleting the moving icon is executed. The downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon in FIG. 61(r) indicates the moving direction of the variation icon.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change. A character image or a decorative pattern may be used for the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. By changing the aspect ratio of the character image or the decorative pattern, the presence of the character image or the decorative pattern is enhanced, It may be possible to give a strong impression to the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 makes one rotation (360° rotation), but by using the slip ring described above in the sub display device 1030, the sub display device 1030 is made to rotate one rotation or more. It may have been done. For example, the greater the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

The aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change in relation to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a predetermined function in which the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030 is a variable, and based on the aspect ratio, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is determined. The display image may be generated using the work area of the VRAM 436. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change randomly. For example, when the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of an image using a random number and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. There may be. Further, the display area of the image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change of the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. The aspect ratio of the image may change so as to keep the display area constant.

Further, when the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, as compared with the case where the rotation display notice effect is not performed, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed is configured to be higher. May be In addition, when the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes, compared to the case where the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change, in the special figure variation game being executed. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning a big hit. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the frequency and degree of change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the larger the frequency of changing the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may be increased. The greater the degree of change in the aspect ratio of, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon and the variable icon is performed during the rotation display notice effect. When the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon or the variable icon is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect is finally settled and displayed, as compared with the case where the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon or the variable icon is not performed. It may be configured to be easy. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the effect of rotating the sub display device 1030 is performed, but instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol display device. There may be a case where an effect of rotating the image displayed on 208 is performed, and by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 simultaneously or separately, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display. The effect of rotating the image displayed on the device 1030 may be performed in some cases. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 18)
An example of sub-display device 1030 production of Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. 62(a) to 62(r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. FIG. 62(a) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 61(a). Next, FIG. 62(b) shows the state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 61(b). Next, in FIG. 62C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 ends, and the variable icon display area 1940 is displayed. The change icon 1941 is displayed. Also, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, FIG. 62C shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the line of the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. It shows the state.

FIG. 62D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, an image of the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image that represents the line of the character image H1 of the merchant.

62(e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Shows the state in which was notified. Next, FIG. 62(f) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 61(f). Next, FIG. 62(g) shows the same state as FIG. 61(g) showing the state where the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. Next, FIG. 62(h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold/fluctuating icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed, which is the same state as FIG. 61(h). Next, FIG. 62(i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is provisionally stopped and the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the same as FIG. 61(i). It shows the state.

FIG. 62(j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and after that, the image of "Chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

FIG. 62K shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 rotated by 45° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. The decorative frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the image displayed in the decorative frame F1 (display of the number held, image of the fourth symbol) (hereinafter, when these images are referred to as “non-rotation target images”) Of the sub-display device 1030 is prioritized over images other than the non-rotation target image (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target image”) in a mode in which the player does not rotate. It is displayed in the upper left. Further, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b are also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Further, the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only a part of the non-rotation target images is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that FIG. 62K shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed form due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 62(l) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 62(k) (a total rotation of 90°). In addition, the non-rotation target image has priority over a part of the character image H3 of Yoshimune and a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area, and is displayed on the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030 by the player. It is moved and displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from above. Note that FIG. 62(l) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed form due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 62(m) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 90° counterclockwise (a total of 180° rotation) from the state of FIG. 62(l) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. .. In addition, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 in a mode that is not rotated when viewed from the player, prior to the decoration frame F2.

FIG. 62(n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 as a rotation center from the state of FIG. 62(m) (total 225° rotation). .. Further, in FIG. 62(n), the pending change image H2 is displayed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.
The middle symbol display area 1030b, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the hall are displayed overlapping. The hold change image H2 displayed in FIG. 62(n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Further, the non-rotation target image is rotated in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player, in preference to a part of the decorative frame F2 and a part of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant. It is moved and displayed in a non-existent manner. Note that FIG. 62(n) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed form due to the problem of space on the paper surface.

FIG. 62( o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation center from the state of FIG. 62(n) (total 270° rotation). .. Also, FIG. 62( o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning is generated from the pending change image H2 and the variable icon displayed in a black circle is struck by lightning. The variable icon having a lightning strike overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 62(o), "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 1 holding icon display area is displayed. It shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 displayed in a black circle in the second area of 1950 appears by the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image takes precedence over a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area and a part of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and the left middle part of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed in a manner not rotated by the player. Note that FIG. 62O shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed form due to the problem of space on the paper surface.

FIG. 62(p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° (a total of 315° rotation) about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 62(o). In addition, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 62(o) and the effect image displayed by overlapping the entire variation icon are deleted, and the variation of the aspect in which the character "heat" is drawn in the circle The icon is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed smaller than other hold icons. In addition, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed on the upper left part of the sub display device 1030 in a manner that it is not rotated as seen from the player, in preference to a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area. Has been done. Note that FIG. 62(p) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed form due to the problem of space on the paper. Next, in FIG. 62(q), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 62(p) (360° in total), and the sub display device is rotated. It shows a state in which 1030 has rotated once and returned to the original state. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed on the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a state in which it is not rotated when viewed from the player, and is returned to the state before the rotation display notice effect is executed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in the same size as the other hold icons. Next, in FIG. 62(r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. This indicates a state in which the fact is notified. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 1940 moves downward, so that an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 1941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the non-rotation target of the decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the image displayed in the decoration frame F1 (holding number display, image of the fourth symbol) The image is displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from the player. Further, when the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, compared to the case where the rotation display notice effect is not performed, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed is increased. It may have been done. Further, the non-rotation target image of the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed so as to be displayed at a conspicuous position of the sub display device 1030 as seen by the player, in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Further, any of the decorative pattern, the Yoshimune character image H3, the grandfather character image H1, the hold icon, the variable icon, the decorative frame F2, or the like, or all images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are non-rotation targets. The image may be displayed in a state where it is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in this case, the larger the number of non-rotation target images, the higher the probability of winning the big hit in the special figure variation game being executed may be configured. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed, or a decorative symbol. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 simultaneously or separately, the effect of rotating the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 19)
An effect example of the sub display device 1030 of Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. 63(a) to 63(l) show the special figure 1 variation game in time series. In the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 63 and FIGS. 64 to 69 described later is displayed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. ing. As the other effect, for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern and displaying a predetermined background or character may be used.

FIG. 63A shows a state in which “1” indicating that the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed as the number of holdings display image in the holding display area 1030e in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. There is. Next, in FIG. 63(b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the hold number of the special figure 1 is 0 as the hold number display image in the hold display area 1030e in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. The state where "0" is displayed is shown.

FIG. 63C shows a state in which the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27(b) (hereinafter, also referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 63D shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which it is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Further, the hold display area 1030e in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 is moved to the upper left part of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 degrees clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. ° It is displayed rotated.

FIG. 63(e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 63(d) (a total of 90° rotation). Is shown. Further, the image of “0” displayed in the hold display area 1030e as the number-of-holds display image is rotated by 45 degrees clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated by 90 degrees (total 90 degrees). Next, in FIG. 63(f), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 63(e) (a total rotation of 135°). It shows the state of being. Also, the hold display area 1030 in the upper left part of the sub display device 1030.
e has moved to the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. The display is rotated (a total of 135° rotation). Next, in FIG. 63(g), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 63(f) (180° in total). It shows the state of being. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 180° rotation).

FIG. 63(H) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display region of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 63(g) (total 225° rotation). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 1030e in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of “0” of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated by 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed by rotating (total of 225°). Next, in FIG. 63(i), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 63(H) (total 270° rotation). It shows the state of being. Further, the image of “0” of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated by 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed (rotated 270° in total). Next, in FIG. 63(j), the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 63(i) (total 315° rotation). It shows the state of being done. Further, the hold display area 1030e in the lower right part of the sub display device 1030 is moved to the original position in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of “0” displayed in the hold display area 1030e as the number-of-holds display image is rotated by 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated (total of 315° rotation). Next, in FIG. 63(k), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 63(j) (total 360° rotation). It shows the state of being done. Further, the image of “0” displayed in the hold display area 1030e as the number-of-holds display image is rotated by 45° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 360° rotation). Next, FIG. 63(l) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect is finished, and the character image H3 of the player is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub-display device 1030 is rotated to display the rotation of the character image of the hall. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the number-of-holds display image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode that the player does not rotate. Further, the hold display area 1030e of the sub display device 1030 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 1030 as seen by the player, in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the number-of-holds display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it. Further, when the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, as compared with the case where the rotation display notice effect is not performed, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed is configured to be higher. May be. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate once (360° rotation), but by using the slip ring described above in the sub display device 1030, the sub display device 1030 rotates one rotation or more. May be configured to do so. For example, the greater the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated simultaneously or separately. Therefore, the effect of this embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In the case of performing the effect of this embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 20)
An effect example of Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. 64(a) to (k) show the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 64(a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 64B shows a state in which the hall character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27(b) (hereinafter, also referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 64C shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 64C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Next, FIGS. 64D to 64J show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45°. In addition, in FIGS. 64D to 64J, the character image H3 of the player is displayed by being rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always visually recognized as not rotating. Next, FIG. 64(k) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect is finished, and the character image H3 of the player is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 of the hall displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying the character image, the character image is displayed in a state where it is not rotated as seen from the player. Therefore, even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness. Further, when the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, as compared with the case where the rotation display notice effect is not performed, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed is configured to be higher. May be Further, in the present embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, but the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 is opposite. There may be a case where the character image is rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. In some cases, the character image may be rotated and displayed at different speeds. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately. There may be a case where a performance is performed.

(Example 21)
An effect example of Example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65(a) to (l) show the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 65(a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 65(b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27(b) (hereinafter, also referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 65C shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 65C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. In addition, the character image H3 of the hall is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state shown in FIG. 65B. Next, in FIG. 65(d), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display region of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 65(c) (rotation by 90° in total). It shows the state of being done. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of the hall is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state shown in FIG. 65(c). Next, in FIG. 65(e), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 65(d) (a total rotation of 135°). It shows the state of being done. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. In addition, the character image H3 of the hall is slightly enlarged in the horizontal direction and compressed in the vertical direction from the state shown in FIG. 65(d). Next, in FIG. 65(f), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 65(e) (a total rotation of 180°). It shows the state of being done. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. The character image H3 of the lord is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction from the state shown in FIG. 65(e) and is enlarged in the vertical direction to be displayed. The aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the lord is shown in FIG. It has returned to the state of (b). Next, FIGS. 65G to 65J show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45°. Further, in FIGS. 65(g) to (j), the character image H3 of the player is displayed by being rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always visually recognized as not rotating. Further, in FIGS. 65(g) to 65(j), the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the hall is not changed. Next, FIG. 64(l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect is finished, and the character image H3 of the player is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 of the hall displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying the character image, the character image is displayed in a state where it is not rotated as seen from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the hall displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes. Therefore, even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness, and the character image By changing the aspect ratio, the presence of the character image may be enhanced and the player may be given a strong impression. Further, when the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, as compared with the case where the rotation display notice effect is not performed, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed is configured to be higher. May be Further, in the present embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, but the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 is opposite. There may be a case where the character image is rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. In some cases, the character image may be rotated and displayed at different speeds. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the frequency and degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the greater the frequency of changing the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be, or the sub display device 1030 is displayed. The larger the degree to which the aspect ratio of the character image changes, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In the case of performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 22)
An effect example of Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. 66(a) to 66(f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 66(a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device when the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 66B shows a state in which the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is an image used for the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

66(c) to 66(e) show a state in which the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 moves in the horizontal direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the rectangles indicated by the two-dot chain lines in FIGS. 66(c) to 66(e) indicate the positions of the sub display device 1030 before the horizontal movement.

FIG. 66C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 66B. Also, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode in which it moves rightward by the same distance as the leftward movement distance of the sub display device 1030. There is. Therefore, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed as if it were not moving when viewed from the player. In addition, the sub display device 1
In 030, a part of the character image H4 of the princess that has been cut off on the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the upper left portion. In addition, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability.

FIG. 66(d) shows a state where the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 66(c). Also, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode in which it moves rightward by the same distance as the leftward movement distance of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it as if it is not moving. In the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left portion.

FIG. 66(e) shows a state where the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 66(d). Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode in which it moves leftward by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 rightward. Therefore, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed as if it were not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image H4 is cut off.

FIG. 66(f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 66(e), and the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect has ended. The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode in which it moves to the left by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 to the right. Therefore, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in a state of not moving as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed.

As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, while the sub display device 1030 is laterally moved, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 at the same speed. Thus, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in a state where it is not moving as seen from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that has been cut off on the sub display device 1030 before the lateral movement display notice effect is executed is displayed next to the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. The moving display is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance. Therefore, the player pays attention to the moving distance of the sub display device 1030, which may improve the interest of the game. Further, in the effect during the symbol change, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode, as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured to be easily displayed as a fixed stop. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character may be displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character in the hall may be displayed. Further, while the sub display device 1030 moves leftward by a predetermined distance, the princess character image H4 is displayed, whereas the sub display device 1030 moves rightward by a predetermined distance, so that the enemy character of the lord is displayed. May be displayed. Further, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the hall and the character image H4 of the princess used for the advance notice of the horizontal movement display in the present embodiment may change in the aspect ratio during the advance notice of the horizontal movement display. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In the case of performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 23)
An effect example of Example 23 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. 67(a) to 67(f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 67(a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 67(b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27(b) (hereinafter, also referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). 67(b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67(b). .. The image data shown in FIG. 67(b-1) has a lord's character image H3 and a princess's character image H4 at the lower left of the lord's character image H3. What is the lord's character image H3 and princess's character image H4? It is the image data in a non-rotated form. In addition, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. 67(b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67(b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67(b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 67(b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut around the center of the image data to obtain display data. 67(b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67(b-2).

67(c) to 67(e) show a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice production of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45° counterclockwise in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then rotates clockwise. It is rotated 45°. In addition, the rectangle indicated by the chain double-dashed line in FIGS. 67C to 67E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 67C to 67E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

67C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 30° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 67B. .. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been cut off from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower left portion in a state where the player does not rotate it. 67(c-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67(c). The image data shown in FIG. 67(c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 67(b-1) 30° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 67C-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67C-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67C. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 67C-1 with the center of the image data as the center. 67(c-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67(c-2) so that the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67(b). The state rotated by 30° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 67C is shown.

67D shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 15° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 67C. .. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, on the sub-display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotating as seen from the player. 67D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67D. The image data shown in FIG. 67(d-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 67(c-1) clockwise by 15° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 67D-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67D-1 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67D. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 67(d-1) around the center of the image data. 67(d-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67(d-2) so that the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67(e). The state after being rotated by 15° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 67D is shown.

FIG. 67(e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67(d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotated by the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub display device 1030. Further, FIG. 67(e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect. 67(e-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67(e). The image data shown in FIG. 67(e-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 67(d-1) by 15° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). 67E-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67E-1 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67E. The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 67(c-2). 67(e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67(c-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67(d). The state rotated by 15° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 67D is shown. 67(e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 67(c-3).

67(f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 67(e) by 30° in the clockwise direction with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. 67(f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67(f). The image data shown in FIG. 67(f-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 67(e-1) 30° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 67(f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67(f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67(f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is shown in FIG.
This is the same as the display data shown in b-2). 67(f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67(f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67(e). A state in which the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 67(f) is rotated by 30° is shown. 67(f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 67(b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect according to the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated and displayed at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. , The character image H3 of the hall is displayed in a state where it is not rotated as seen from the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that has been cut off on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation display advance notice effect is executed is displayed in rotation on the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. Is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Further, the princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 rotates by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, which may improve the interest of the game.

Further, the princess character image H4 may be displayed in the upper left part of the hall character image. In this case, the princess character image H4 displayed before rotation is cut off on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. In addition, by adjusting the display position of the princess character image H4, the sub display device 1030 can be cut off from the sub display device 1030 by rotating the sub display device 1030 by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, which may improve the interest of the game.

In the rotation display notice production of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 1030. You can For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character in the hall may be displayed. Further, while the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the princess character image H4, the sub display device 1030 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle to cause an enemy of the lord. The character may be displayed in some cases. Further, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the hall and the character image H4 of the princess used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect. Further, in the effect during the symbol change, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode, as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured to be easily displayed as a fixed stop. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In the case of performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 24)
An example of effects in Example 24 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68. 68(a) to (f) show the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

FIG. 68(a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, in FIG. 68(b), the sub display device 1030 moves downward, and the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 and the character image H1 of the merchant is displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. The state is shown. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the notice effect of "rotation" shown in FIG. 27(b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). 68(b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68(b). The image data shown in FIG. 68(b-1) has a lord's character image H3 and a princess's character image H4 at the lower left of the lord's character image H3. What is the lord's character image H3 and princess's character image H4? It is the image data in a non-rotated form. In addition, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. 68(b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68(b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68(b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 68(b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut around the center of the image data to obtain display data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 68(b-2) is stored in the first sub-control unit 400 at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68(b-1). It is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. 68(b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68(b-2). Further, the merchant character image H1 is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 68(b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 68(b-1) is given priority over the merchant character image H1. It may be displayed as

68(c) to 68(e) show a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice production of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45° counterclockwise in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then rotates clockwise. It is rotated 45°. Also, the rectangles indicated by the two-dot chain lines in FIGS. 68(c) to 68(e) indicate the positions of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. Also, the arrows shown in FIGS. 68C to 68E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

68C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 30° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 68B. .. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. In addition, the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 rotates from the state shown in FIG. Is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated counterclockwise by 30° about the center of rotation. Further, on the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been completely cut off from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image H1 in a manner that the player does not rotate. Further, FIG. 68C-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68C. The image data shown in FIG. 68(c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 68(b-1) 30° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 68C-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68C-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68C. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 68(c-1) with the center of the image data as the center. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 68(c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 68(b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68(c-1). It is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400 is superimposed. 68(c-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68(c-2) so that the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68(b). The state rotated by 30° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 68C is shown.

68D shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 15° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center from the state shown in FIG. 68C. .. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. In addition, the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 68(c) to the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates. Is displayed counterclockwise by 15° about the center of rotation. Further, on the sub-display device 1030, all of the princess character image H4 is displayed to the right of the merchant character image H1 in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 68D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68D. The image data shown in FIG. 68(d-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 68(c-1) clockwise by 15° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 68D-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68D-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68D. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 68(d-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 68(d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 68(b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68(d-1). It is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400 is superimposed. 68(d-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68(d-2) so that the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68(c). The state rotated by 15° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 68D is shown.

FIG. 68(e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68(d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. In addition, the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 68D so that the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Is displayed in a state of being rotated by 15° clockwise about the rotation center. In the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image H1 in a manner not rotated by the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub display device 1030. ing. Also, FIG. 68(e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect. Further, FIG. 68(e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68(e). The image data shown in FIG. 68(e-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 68(d-1) by 15° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 68(e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68(e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68(e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 68(e-1) with the center of the image data as the center. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 68(e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 68(b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68(e-1). It is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 68(e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68(e-2) to rotate the sub display device 1030 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68(d). The state of being rotated by 15° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 68D is shown.

68(f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 68(e) by 30° in the clockwise direction with the center of the image display region of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 68(e) to the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates. The image is displayed in a state in which it is rotated clockwise by 30° about the center of rotation and returned to the original position. Further, on the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. 68(f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68(f). The image data shown in FIG. 68(f-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 68(e-1) 30° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 68F-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68F-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68F. The generated display data is shown. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 68(f-2) is stored in the first sub-control unit 400 at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68(b-1). The display data is the display data obtained by superimposing the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 68(b-2). 68(f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68(f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68(e). A state in which the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 68(f) is rotated by 30° is shown. 68(f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 68(b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, while the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the sub display device 1030 displays a character image (a character image H3 of the lord) displayed in a non-rotating manner as seen from the player. And a character image H4) of a princess and a character image (character image H1 of a merchant) displayed in a manner of being rotated when viewed from the player. On the rotating sub-display device 1030, a character image displayed in a non-rotating state as viewed by the player and a character image displayed in a rotating state as viewed by the player are simultaneously displayed, It may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise. Further, in the effect during the symbol change, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode, as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured to be easily displayed as a fixed stop. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In the case of performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming table according to the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 68 again.

(D1)
A gaming table provided with a first movable body (for example, a movable body 1002) capable of executing a production operation for producing a game,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000),
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from a second position (for example, an initial position) to a first position (for example, a lowermost position),
The first movable body is configured to move from the first position (for example, the lowermost position) to the second position (for example, the initial position) when the power is turned on. ,
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The effect operation is configured to start from the second position (for example, an initial position) and end at the second position,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, it may be possible to improve the durability of the driving unit that drives the first movable body.

(D2)
The gaming machine described in (D1) above,
Even when the power is turned off in a state where the first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is located at a position different from the second position (for example, the initial position), the first movable body is Configured to move to the first position,
A game table characterized by that.

(D3)
The gaming table according to (D1) or (D2) above,
The effect operation includes an operation of moving to a third position (for example, an uppermost position),
The third position and the first position are different positions,
The third position and the second position are different positions,
A game table characterized by that.

(D4)
The gaming machine described in (D3) above,
An image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display unit,
The third position is a position on the front side of the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(D5)
The gaming machine described in (D4) above,
It is possible to execute a big hit operation (for example, a big hit game effect),
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208),
At least the notice image (for example, the image of a cloud or the image of a balloon) displayed on the image display means when the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, the uppermost position). In some cases, the first movable body may overlap,
The notice image is the notice image of the jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.

(D6)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can execute an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,
In the above (D1), "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position" means "the first movable body moves from the first position to the initial operation". And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation" (see, for example, FIGS. 43(c) to (g)),
A game table characterized by that.

(D7)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can execute an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,
In the above (D1), "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position" means "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position". After the movement to the position No., the initial operation is started, and at the end of the initial operation, the operation is again moved to the second position” (for example, refer to FIGS. 45(n) to (p)).
A game table characterized by that.

(D8)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above,
“When the power is turned off” described in (D1) above is “when the main power of the gaming table is turned off”,
The “when the power is turned on” described in (D1) above is “when the main power of the gaming table is turned on”.
A game table characterized by that.

(D9)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D8) above,
The first movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is a movable body whose posture can be changed.
A game table characterized by that.

(D10)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D9) above,
A second movable body (for example, movable body 1006) capable of performing a production operation for producing a game is provided,
The second movable body is a movable body which starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game table characterized by that.

(D11)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.

(D12)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000),
A game table characterized by that.

All the effect operations of the first effect movable body are configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.

(D13)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (12) above,
The staging operation may start from the second position and end at the fourth position,
The staging operation may start from the fourth position and end at the second position,
The fourth position is a position different from the first position,
The fourth position is a position different from the second position,
The fourth position is a position different from the third position,
A game table characterized by that.

(D14)
The gaming machine described in (D13) above,
The effect operation may be started from the fourth position and ended at the fourth position,
A game table characterized by that.

(D15)
The game table according to (D13) or (14) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the fourth position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the fourth position. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

(D16)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D15) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the third position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the third position. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

(D17)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D16) above,
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body,
A game machine comprising: a drive unit that drives the movable body.

The first control means is a main control unit 300 that performs a lottery advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit lottery). The first control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards.

The second control means, in accordance with the command signal from the first control means, produces means for producing a game (for example, an illumination section (LED or the like), sound output means (speaker or the like), image display means (liquid crystal display). It is a sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that performs effect control of the device, the dot matrix, etc. The second control unit may be configured by one or a plurality of control circuits, or 1 Alternatively, the second control means may, for example, randomly select an effect to be performed by the effecting means in accordance with drive control of the effecting means or a command signal from the first controlling means. Select, etc.

The third control unit is a production control unit that communicates with the second control unit and performs production control (for example, drive control) of the production unit. The effect control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards. The third control means may control the effect means according to the effect command from the second control means, or determines the effect to be executed according to the effect command from the second control means, Information based on the determined result may be returned to the second control unit or the rendering unit may be driven.

The fourth control means is a production control means that communicates with the third control means and performs production control of one or more or all of the production means (the sub liquid crystal unit 1030 and the movable bodies 1002 to 1012). The fourth control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards. The effect means may be controlled according to the effect command, or the effect to be executed is determined according to the effect command from the third control means, and information based on the determined result is returned to the third control means. Alternatively, the rendering unit may be driven, and the fourth control unit may be mounted on the moving unit 1036.

(D18)
The gaming machine described in (D17) above,
The fourth control means is mounted on a drive unit (for example, moving unit 1036),
When at least one operation (for example, vertical movement) of the plurality of operations by the movable body, the drive unit also performs the same operation,
A game table characterized by that.

In the above-described embodiment, since the moving unit 1036 is provided on the movable body 1002, when the movable body 1002 moves up and down, the moving unit 1036 also operates together with the movable body 1002, but the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. In this case, the moving unit 1036 is configured not to rotate. Note that the moving unit 1036 may be arranged separately from the moving body 1002 so that the moving unit 1036 does not move together when the moving body 1002 moves up and down, or when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. The mobile unit 1036 may be configured to operate together, or the mobile unit 1036 may be configured to operate together during all operations of the movable body 1002.

Although the movable body 1002 has been shown as an example capable of performing vertical movements (position change, movement) and rotation movements (posture change), operations other than vertical movement (for example, horizontal position change/movement) may be performed. However, a tilting operation (for example, an operation in which the left or right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 tilts forward or backward around the vertical rotation axis or an upper side or lower side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 around the horizontal rotation axis moves forward or backward). The operation of tilting backward) may be performed.

(D19)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D18) above,
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body,
Drive means for driving the movable body,
A detection means for detecting the position of the first movable body,
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the position of the first movable body is confirmed.
When the position of the first movable body is not the first position, the first movable body is configured to move to the first position,
The confirmation condition is a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off,
A game table characterized by

(E1)
An image display unit (for example, a main liquid crystal unit 1001 or a sub liquid crystal unit 1032) capable of displaying a performance image that directs a game,
Drive means (for example, a motor) for driving the image display unit,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means,
In a period (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around a rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction), the image display is performed. A first moving image (for example, a moving image of the character image H3 of the lord or a moving image of the princess character image H4) may be displayed on the unit,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 68(b) to (d)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above structure, the movement of the image display unit gives an impact, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the period of the movement. May allow the player to perform actions that he or she does not normally see, which may allow the player to forget his or her daily routine and concentrate more on the game. Further, all the periods during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. Also, with a certain effect as an opportunity, all the periods from the time the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to the stop may be the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect. A part of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to when it stops may be set as the first period.

(E2)
The gaming machine described in (E1) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image (see, for example, FIGS. 68B to 68D),
A game table characterized by that.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example in which the facial expression, outer shape, and the like of the first image (the character image H3 of the lord and the character image H4 of the princess) are fixedly displayed is shown. The outer shape and the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 68 as an example, the face of the lord, which was not displayed in FIG. 68(a), is displayed as a true face in FIG. 68(b), and becomes slightly smiling in FIG. 68(c). An animation may be performed in which a full smile appears in 68(d), the smile slightly returns in FIG. 68(e), and a true face returns in FIG. 68(f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image H3 of the lord) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image H3 of the lord moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, and changes in the outer shape of the character and the like, variable display of the serif (change display from the partial character string indicating the serif to the entire character string, etc.), character or icon Color change, moving display of characters or icons, or the like, or a combination of these.

(E3)
The gaming table according to (E1) or (E2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction) (see, for example, FIGS. 68(b) to (d)),
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction (for example, a clockwise direction) (for example, FIGS. 68(b-1) and (c-1), (See (d-1)),
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite orientations,
A game table characterized by that.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain effect (for example, the timing of starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). Direction (for example, leftward), and with other effects as an opportunity (for example, arrival of the timing to start effects by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the big hit begins) The first direction when the display unit operates may be another direction (for example, rightward). In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite direction. In this case, it is necessary for the player to move or rotate the first image faster than the moving or rotating of the image display unit. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained in a manner in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and further, the first image in the image display unit is further accelerated. There are times when it becomes possible to focus on the game by forgetting the more everyday feeling from rotating and moving.

(E4)
The gaming machine described in (E3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed (for example, FIGS. 68(b) to 68(d) and FIGS. 68(b-1), (c-1), (d-1). )reference),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit seems to be moving to the player, but the display position, display angle, etc. of the first image do not seem to be moving, so it is extraordinary as a notification means. When the notification itself by the image display unit can play the same role as when it does not move, and it is possible to make both impactful operation and notification There is. In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite to each other, and the first speed and the second speed may be different, and in that case, rather than moving or rotating the image display unit, The player visually recognizes that one image moves or rotates slowly. For this reason, the aspect in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit is routinely seen in TVs, nets, etc. However, since the image display unit rotates, it is not possible to obtain it in the fixed image display unit. It is possible to give the player a realistic sensation, and since the first image in the image display unit moves and rotates so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the image display unit, a more everyday feeling is obtained. It may be possible to forget about and concentrate on the game. Also, when the image display unit moves or rotates quickly with a focus on impact, by slowly moving or rotating the first image, the notification itself by the image display unit display becomes close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.

(E5)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a character image H1 of a merchant) is displayed (for example, see FIG. 68),
A game table characterized by that.
(E6)
The gaming machine described in (E5) above,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 68(b-2), (c-2), and (d-2). ),
A game table characterized by that.

The gaming machine having the above configuration may be configured such that the second image that does not move in the first direction is not displayed during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movements of the image display unit and the image have a sense of unity and have a greater impact. The staging operation may be executable in some cases.

(E7)
The gaming machine according to (E5) or (E6) above,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example in which the facial expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1′) is fixedly displayed is shown, but according to the gaming machine having the configuration, The expression, outline, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, to explain with reference to FIG. 36, the face of the merchant, which was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 36A, is displayed as a true face in FIG. 36B, and a little in FIG. 36C. An animation may be performed such that the face becomes a steep face, the face becomes a steep face in FIG. 36(d), the face returns to a slightly steep face in FIG. 36(e), and returns to the true face in FIG. 36(f). Further, the aspect in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, and changes in the outer shape of the character and the like, variable display of the serif (change display from the partial character string indicating the serif to the entire character string, etc.), character or icon Color change, moving display of characters or icons, or the like, or a combination of these.

(E8)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in (E1) means “rotate by driving the driving means”,
"The first image moves in the first direction" described in (E1) above means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit (see, for example, FIG. 68),
A game table characterized by that.
(E9)
The gaming machine according to (E3) or (E4) above,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise (see, for example, FIG. 68),
A game table characterized by that.
(E10)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in (E1) means “move linearly by driving the driving means”,
"The first image moves in the first direction" described in (E1) above means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" (see, for example, FIG. 66). ),
A game table characterized by that.

The above "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" may be "the first image moves linearly in the vertical direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned “the first image moves linearly in the first direction” may be “the first image moves linearly in the left-right direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of leftward and rightward. The above "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" may be "the first image moves linearly in an oblique direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

A modified example of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the movement by the drive of the drive means may be a combined movement of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, lateral direction, diagonal direction, front-back direction when viewed from the player). In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to include a plurality of image display units. In addition, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a performance movable body. In addition, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the production movable body is in the movable state, the image display unit is rotated or moved. It may be configured such that the effecting movable body is stopped and then moved to the initial state. Further, during the symbol variation display, the case in which the effect operation shown in FIG. 64 is performed is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, as compared with the case where the effect operation shown in FIG. 63 is performed. The mode may be configured to be a big hit mode easily, and when the effect operation of FIG. 63 is performed during the symbol variable display, the effect operation of FIG. 63 is performed. The symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variable display may be configured to be a big hit mode. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 63 is performed during the symbol variable display, the symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variable display may be configured to be a big hit mode, When the effect operation of FIG. 64 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode. 63 and 64 show an example in which the same effect display is performed, but when the sub display device shown in FIG. 63 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates together. The effect visually recognized by the player is different from the effect visually recognized by the player such that the image displayed on the sub display device shown in FIG. 64 does not rotate together when the sub display device rotates. It may be configured to produce the effect. For example, "one of the other productions" is a production in which the lord fights the musician, and "the other production of the other productions" is a production in which the princess dances. Good. One type of "one of other effects" may be installed, a plurality of types may be installed, and one type of "the other effect of another effects" may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. In addition, when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 33, at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device is rotated together with the number of types of effects. As shown in 64, when the sub-display device rotates, at least part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub-display device is viewed by the player so as not to rotate together. The number of types may be increased. On the contrary, when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 64, at least part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player not to be rotated together. 63 of the effects in which at least part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated together when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 63. The number of types may be increased.

Further, the effect example shown in FIG. 63 and the effect example shown in FIG. 64 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image does not rotate the image displayed on the sub-display so that it is visible to the player as it rotates with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed on the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed B′ (eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that for the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed C′ (eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as slowly rotating. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at the speed D (eg, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. Without rotating at least a part or all of the image in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed D (eg, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub-display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed by the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed E′ (eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed by the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed F′ (eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period before the sub display device finishes rotating (period G), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at speed G (eg, 20 rpm) to display on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so that it can be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. As described above, as illustrated in the periods A to D, as the period in which the sub display device rotates increases, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. By rotating the sub-display device and shifting to a state where the player can visually recognize that part or all of the display of the sub-display device is stopped, a new sense of unity with the sub-display device and images can be obtained. In some cases, it is possible to perform a certain effect. Further, as in the example from the period D to the period G, as the period in which the sub display device rotates advances, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device. By allowing the player to visually recognize such changes, it may be possible to perform a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced, and in the periods D to G, the sub display is performed. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased from period A to D. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and in the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. You may comprise so that the difference of speed may be made small gradually. Although the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated here, the present invention is also applicable to the linear display sub display device and the image displayed on the linear moving sub display device. Is also possible.

(F1)
A production movable body (for example, a movable body 1001 or a movable body 1002) capable of executing a movable operation for producing a game,
A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with windows (for example, transparent portions 1008a, 1008b);
A gaming machine equipped with
The effect movable body may perform an operation behind the ornamental body (see, for example, FIGS. 52(f) to (k)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table having the configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the ornament can allow the player to visually recognize the operation of the effect movable body through the window of the ornament, and as an effect means. In some cases, it is possible to perform a motion that is not seen in daily life, which allows the player to forget his or her daily life and concentrate more on the game.

(F2)
The gaming machine described in (F1) above,
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured such that the player can visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion (see, for example, FIGS. 52(f) to (k)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game stand having the configuration, since the effect movable body hidden by the ornament is configured to be capable of displaying an image, the action and image of the effect movable body can be displayed to the player through the window of the ornament. Can be visually recognized, and as an informing means, it is possible to perform an operation that cannot be seen on a daily basis, and it may be possible for the player to forget his or her daily life and concentrate more on the game. In addition, a plurality of effect movable bodies capable of displaying images may be provided, or only one effect movable body may be provided. Further, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image operable behind the decorative body may have a main liquid crystal unit or may have a sub liquid crystal unit. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image that can be operated behind the decorative body may have both the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, or may have two or more sub liquid crystal units. There may be

(F3)
The gaming machine described in (F2) above,
The image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change due to the operation of the effect movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 52(f) to 52(k) ),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, the image displayed on the effect movable body visually recognized through the window portion of the decorative body changes by performing the operation behind the decorative body. In some cases, it can give a surprising surprise. Further, the above-mentioned "the image of the effect movable body changes" means that the image displayed on the effect movable body is changed (for example, the shape or display color of the image of the cloud is changed). It also includes the case where the appearance of the image displayed on the production movable body changes.

(F4)
The gaming table according to any one of (F1) to (F3) above,
The ornamental body is operable (see, for example, FIGS. 52(e) and 52(f)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, since the ornamental body can operate, it may be possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the ornamental object and the operation of the effect movable member are interlocked.

(F5)
The gaming table according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing variable display of symbols (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214),
A game table characterized by that.
(F6)
The gaming machine described in (F5) above,
In the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, the player visually recognizes a part of the image (for example, cloud image) on the effect movable body through the window of the ornament by the operation of the ornament. When it becomes possible, a big hit as the final result of the variable display of the symbol, as compared with the case where the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body. It is configured such that the symbol aspect is easily confirmed and displayed (see, for example, FIG. 52 and FIG. 53),
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the notice image,
A game table characterized by that.
(F7)
The gaming machine according to (F5) or (F6) above,
By the operation of the decoration, a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode (for example, a white rhombus mode) of the effect movable body is played through the window (for example, the transparent part 1008b) of the decoration. When the player becomes visible, compared to the case where the player does not become able to see a part of the image of the hold icon in the effect movable body in the look-ahead mode through the window of the decorative body, The jackpot pattern mode is configured to be easily displayed as a final result of the variable display of the symbols started after the suspension corresponding to the suspension icon is exhausted (for example, see FIG. 59),
A game table characterized by that.
(F8)
The gaming table according to any one of F1 to F7,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(F9)
A production movable body (for example, a sub display device 1030 of the movable body 1002) capable of executing a movable operation for producing a game,
A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with windows (for example, transparent portions 1008a, 1008b);
With a symbol display means (for example, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, or the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c),
Second image display means including an image display (for example, sub display device 1030),
A first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) different from the second image display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The second image display means can perform a first movement (for example, a leftward lateral movement) behind the ornamental body (see, for example, FIG. 66 ),
The effect movable body is the second image display means,
During execution of the first movement, an image of a pattern moved in a second direction (for example, rightward) opposite to the first direction (for example, displayed on the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 66). It is possible to show to the player that the design is not moving in the first direction (for example, see FIG. 66), by displaying the image) on the second image display means.
In a state before the second image display means performs the first movement, an image of a part of the design (hereinafter, referred to as “first design”) (for example, a princess character image H4 or a hall). The image of the enemy character) does not fit in the display area of the second image display means and is not displayed on the second image display means (for example, see FIG. 66(b)),
By laterally moving a predetermined distance in the first direction by the first movement of the second image display means, the first display or the second display may be performed,
The first display is a display in which a first image (for example, an image of an enemy character of the lord) as the image of the first picture is contained within the display area of the second image display means. (For example, see paragraph “0953”),
The second display is a display in which a second image (for example, a princess character image h4) as the image of the first picture is contained in the display area of the second image display means ( For example, see FIG. 66(d)),
The first image and the second image are different images,
During execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, when the second display is performed rather than when the first display is performed, the big hit symbol aspect is after the symbol variation display. It is easy to confirm and display (for example, see paragraph “0953”),
A game table characterized by that.
(F10)
The gaming machine described in (F9) above,
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is possible for the player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window (see, for example, FIGS. 52(f) to (k)),
A game table characterized by that.
(F11)
The gaming machine described in (F10) above,
The image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change due to the operation of the effect movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 52(f) to 52(k) ),
A game table characterized by that.
(F12)
The gaming table according to any one of (F9) to (F11) above,
The ornamental body is operable (see, for example, FIGS. 52(e) and 52(f)),
A game table characterized by that.
(F13)
The gaming table according to any one of (F9) to (F12) above,
In the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, the player visually recognizes a part of the image (for example, cloud image) on the effect movable body through the window of the ornament by the operation of the ornament. When it becomes possible, a big hit as the final result of the variable display of the symbol, as compared with the case where the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body. It is easy to confirm and display the symbol aspect (for example, see FIG. 52 and FIG. 53),
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the notice image,
A game table characterized by that.
(F14)
The gaming machine described in (F13) above,
By the operation of the decoration, a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode (for example, a white rhombus mode) of the effect movable body is played through the window (for example, the transparent part 1008b) of the decoration. When the player becomes visible, compared to the case where the player does not become able to see a part of the image of the hold icon in the effect movable body in the look-ahead mode through the window of the decorative body, The jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbols started after the suspension corresponding to the suspension icon is exhausted (see, for example, FIG. 59),
A game table characterized by that.
(F15)
The gaming table according to any one of (F9) to (F14) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(F16)
A first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
Second image display means (for example, sub-display devices 209, 1030),
A gaming machine equipped with
The second image display means is an image display means capable of executing the first movement (see, for example, FIGS. 37 and 66),
The first movement is a movement of a predetermined distance in a first direction (for example, to the left) in the second display means,
After the first movement of the second image display means is started, first display or second display may be performed,
During execution of the first movement, an image of a first pattern (for example, a character image used for a lateral movement display effect) moved in a second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed as the first image. The player can be made to appear as if they were not moving in one direction (see, for example, FIGS. 37 and 66),
The first display is a display in which a first image (for example, an image of an enemy character of the lord) as the image of the first picture is contained within the display area of the second image display means. (For example, see paragraph “0954”),
The second display is a display in which a second image (for example, a princess character image h4) as the image of the first picture is contained in the display area of the second image display means ( For example, see FIG. 37(d) and FIG. 66(d)),
The first image and the second image are different images,
During execution of the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display when the second display is performed than when the first display is performed ( For example, see paragraph “0954”),
A game table characterized by that.
(F17)
The gaming machine described in (F16) above,
In a state before the second image display means executes the first movement, the image of the first pattern does not fit in the display area of the second image display means, and the second image Is not displayed on the display means (for example, see FIG. 66(b)),
A game table characterized by that.
(F18)
The gaming table according to (F16) or (F17) above,
A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with windows (for example, transparent portions 1008a, 1008b),
It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the image on the second image display means through the window (see, for example, FIG. 52(f)),
A game table characterized by that.
(F19)
The gaming machine described in (F18) above,
It is possible for the player to visually recognize the image of the first image display means through the window (for example, see FIG. 52(f)),
A game table characterized by that.
(F20)
The gaming table according to (F18) or (F19) above,
The operation of the second image display means may change the image of the second image display means visually recognized by the player through the window (for example, FIGS. 52(f) to 52(k)). reference),
A game table characterized by that.
(F21)
The gaming table according to any one of (F18) to (F20) above,
The ornamental body is operable (see, for example, FIGS. 52(e) and 52(f)),
A game table characterized by that.

(F22)
The gaming machine described in (F21) above,
While the symbol variable display is being executed, an image (for example, a cloud image) on the second image display unit is displayed by the operation of the decorative body through the window (for example, the transparent portion 1008b) of the decorative body. When a part of the image is visible to the player, as compared to the case where the player cannot view a part of the image on the second image display means through the window of the ornament, After the symbol variation display, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed (for example, see FIGS. 52 and 53),
A part of the image in the second image display means is an image of at least a part of the notice image,
A game table characterized by that.
(F23)
The gaming machine described in (F22) above,
By the operation of the decorative body, the player can visually recognize a part of the image of the pre-reading mode (for example, a white diamond-shaped mode) of the hold icon in the second image display means through the window of the decorative body. In this case, it is more likely that the player cannot see a part of the image of the pre-reading hold icon in the second image display means through the window of the ornament, The jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is exhausted (for example, see FIG. 59),
A game table characterized by that.
(F24)
The gaming table according to any one of (F16) to (F23) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.

(G1)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the sub display device 1030) can execute a rotation operation (for example, see FIG. 61),
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image (for example, a character image H1 of the hall, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, or the like),
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (for example, see FIG. 61(l)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the image display means is rotated, the aspect ratio of the first image may change, so that the presence of the first image is amplified. There is a case where the player can be strongly impressed. Further, there may be a case where any one of the images of the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, the background pattern, etc., or all of them may be the first image. May use a different image as the first image. Further, the image display means capable of executing the rotation operation may be the main liquid crystal unit or the sub liquid crystal unit. In both cases, the first image may be displayed so that the aspect ratio of the first image changes. For example, when the first image is displayed on the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, and the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit are rotated simultaneously or separately, and the aspect ratio of the first image is changed simultaneously or separately. There may be In addition, by arranging two sub liquid crystal units, the first image may be displayed by the two sub liquid crystal units. In this case, the two sub liquid crystal units may be rotated in a state where they are aligned to change the aspect ratio of the first image.

(G2)
The gaming machine described in (G1) above,
The image display means in which the rotating operation is being performed may display a second image (for example, a decorative frame F1, a display of the number of holdings, an image of a fourth symbol),
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 62(k) to (p)),
A game table characterized by that.
(G3)
The gaming machine described in (G2) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image does not rotate (for example, see FIGS. 62K to 62P),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first image rotates, the second image may not rotate. Therefore, the rotation of the first image is emphasized and the second image is firmly fixed. It can be visually recognized by the player. Further, any one of the images of the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the background pattern, or all of these images may be used as the second image. The different image may be the second image.

(G4)
The gaming table according to any one of (G1) to (G3) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image H4) that has been cut off in the image display means before the rotation operation is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation operation. In some cases (see, for example, FIGS. 67(b) and 67(c)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the image that has been cut off on the image display means before the rotation operation of the image display means is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation operation of the image display means. In some cases, this may give the player an unexpected surprise.

(G5)
The gaming table according to any one of (G1) to (G4) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, the image (for example, the princess character image H4) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation operation. Sometimes you can get out,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, when the image displayed on the image display means before the rotation operation of the image display means is cut off by the rotation operation of the image display means. Therefore, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(G6)
The gaming table according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(G7)
The gaming table according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000),
A game table characterized by that.

(H1)
A production movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) capable of executing a production operation for producing a game,
A base body (for example, a moving unit 1036) capable of supporting the effect movable body,
A gaming machine equipped with
The effect movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is capable of performing a rotation operation,
A slip ring (for example, rotation side substrates 1090, 1140) is provided on one of the effect movable body and the base body,
A conductive portion (for example, conductive portions 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) is provided on the other of the effect movable body and the base body,
By contacting the slip ring and the conductive portion, power is supplied from the side of the base body to the side of the effect movable body,
A game table characterized by that.
(H2)
The gaming machine described in (H1) above,
The base body is provided with a first communication unit (for example, a data transmission/reception unit 1138),
The effect movable body is provided with a second communication unit (for example, a data transmission/reception unit 1144),
The second communication means is a means capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication means,
A game table characterized by that.
(H3)
The gaming table according to (H1) or (H2) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication,
A game table characterized by that.
(H4)
The gaming table according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication,
A game table characterized by that.
(H5)
The gaming table according to any one of (H1) to (H4) above,
The slip ring (for example, the rotation side substrates 1090 and 1140) is provided on the effect movable body,
The conductive portion (for example, the conductive portions 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) is provided on the base body.
A game table characterized by that.
(H6)
The gaming table according to any one of (H1) to (H5) above,
The effect movable body is provided with image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
The second communication unit is a unit capable of receiving the image information signal transmitted from the first communication unit,
A game table characterized by that.

It should be noted that what has been called a lamp or an illumination so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use.This enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed balls as a launch ball, The payout of the balls may be performed by an electronic display.

Note that the matters described in the above detailed description, particularly the matters described in the examples and modified examples shown in the first to third embodiments, can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to the slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG.
The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 2002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 2004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button 2006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal lottery for winning combinations) for determining whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning is won by lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control related to the stop of the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the internally won combination. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, a game medium for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined prize mode In addition to a payout control means (medal payout processing 2008) for performing a medium payout process, a production means 2010 for performing an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and this production means creates a ball in a predetermined game area 2012. A launching device 2014 for launching, a winning opening 2016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detecting unit 2018 for detecting a ball entering the winning port 2016, and a detecting unit 2018 detecting the ball. In the case of doing, a payout means 2020 for paying out a ball, a variable display device 2022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), a shutter 2024 that is movable to a position that shields the variable display device 2022, and operates in a predetermined operation mode. And a movable body 2026 that is provided, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins a prize, the variable display device 2022 changes the symbol and then stops and displays it to produce a game. The slot machine 2000" is also suitable.

The gaming table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 70(a), "A bill is inserted into the bill slot 3002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 3004 and start 3006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 3008. However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash out 3009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 3010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and electronic data that realizes the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 6000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 4000 shown in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data via a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 7C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired game-related data (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 6000 in FIG. 6D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data about the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data about the acquired game ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 7000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 7000 to the home video game console 6000 shown in FIG.

The present invention can also be applied to execute a game in a game program that simulates the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

The present invention according to the above embodiments is summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
At least one of the plurality of displays is a game table equipped with at least display means,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a third display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a second display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a fourth display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode different from the third display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the fourth display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when displaying the first display in the first display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the fourth display mode when displaying the first display in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 1,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in a fifth display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when displaying the first display in the first display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The amount of change from the first display mode to the third display mode is the first amount of change,
The amount of change from the second display mode to the fourth display mode is a second amount of change,
The first variation is the same variation as the second variation,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
At least a part of the first display displayed in the first display mode, when the display means is in the first state, visibility is at least low,
The first state is a state in which at least the second display is displayed in the second display mode on the display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
In the gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The first display is a display including at least a first animation display,
The second display is a display including at least a second animation display,
The first animation display is at least a different animation display than the second animation display,
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the first animation display even when the display mode of the first display is switched from the first display mode to the third display mode. Yes,
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the second animation display even when the display mode of the second display is switched from the second display mode to the fourth display mode. is there,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
In the gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The display means is a display means that does not display the second display in the fourth display mode when displaying the first display in the first display mode,
The display means is a display means that does not display the second display in the second display mode when displaying the first display in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a1)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means may perform a rotation display of the first image,
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
The gaming table described in Appendix a1,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image may not rotate,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
The gaming table described in Appendix a2,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image does not rotate,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a3,
When the rotation display is performed, an image that has been cut off in the image display means before the rotation display may be displayed on the image display means by the rotation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a4,
When the rotation display is performed, the image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display may be cut off in the image display unit by the rotation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
A movable body for performance,
Image display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
When operating the effectable movable body in front of the image display means, there is a case where the first state in which the first image is displayed at the first position is displayed.
The first position is a position behind the effecting movable body in the image display means,
The first image is an effect image,
When operating the effectable movable body in front of the image display means, there may be a second state in which the first image is displayed at the second position,
The second position is a position different from the back of the effecting movable body in the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
The gaming table described in appendix b1,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effecting movable body in the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b3)
The gaming table according to appendix b1 or b2,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
In the first state, the second image may be displayed in the first orientation,
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second orientation,
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b5)
The gaming table described in Appendix b4,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
An image display unit capable of displaying a performance image that directs a game,
Drive means for driving the image display unit,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means,
In the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c2)
The gaming table described in appendix c1,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.
(Appendix c3)
The gaming table according to appendix c1 or c2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation,
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite orientations,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c4)
The gaming table described in appendix c3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices c1 to c4,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the second image is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c6)
The gaming table described in appendix c5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c7)
The gaming table according to appendix c5 or c6,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix c8)
The gaming table described in Appendix c3 or c4,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in appendix c1 means “rotate by driving the driving means”,
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix c1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c9)
The gaming table described in appendix c8,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices c1 to c7,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in appendix c1 means “move linearly by driving the driving means”.
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix c1 means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction”.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
A game table provided with a first movable body capable of executing a production operation for producing a game,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine or slot machine,
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from the second position to the first position,
When the power is turned on, the first movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position,
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The effect operation is configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d2)
The gaming table described in appendix d1,
The first movable body is configured to move to the first position even when the power is turned off in a state where the first movable body is located at a position different from the second position. Is
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d3)
The gaming table according to supplementary note d1 or d2,
The effect operation includes an operation of moving to a third position,
The third position and the first position are different positions,
The third position and the second position are different positions,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d4)
The gaming table described in Appendix d3,
Equipped with image display means,
The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means,
The third position is a position on the front side of the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d5)
The gaming table described in appendix d4,
It is possible to perform jackpot operations,
The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means,
When the first movable body is located at the third position, the first movable body may overlap at least a part of the notice image displayed on the image display means,
The notice image is the notice image of the jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of performing an initial operation on condition that the power supply is turned on,
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in appendix d1 means “the first movable body starts the initial operation from the first position”. And then move to the second position at the end of the initial operation".
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of performing an initial operation on condition that the power supply is turned on,
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in appendix d1 means “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position”. And then move to the second position again at the end of the initial operation".
(Appendix d8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d7,
"When the power is turned off" described in Appendix d1 means "when the main power of the gaming table is turned off".
“When the power is turned on” described in appendix d1 is “when the main power of the gaming table is turned on”.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The first movable body is a movable body whose posture can be changed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d9,
It is equipped with a second movable body that can execute a production operation to produce a game,
The second movable body is a movable body which starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d11)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
An image display unit capable of displaying a performance image that directs a game,
Drive means for driving the image display unit,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means,
In the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix e1,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.
(Appendix e3)
The gaming table according to appendix e1 or e2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation,
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite orientations,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e4)
The gaming table described in Appendix e3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the second image is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e6)
The gaming table described in appendix e5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e7)
The gaming table described in appendix e5 or e6,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix e8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in appendix e1 means “rotate by driving the driving means”,
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix e1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e9)
The gaming table described in Appendix e3 or e4,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in appendix e1 means “move linearly by driving the driving means”,
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix e1 means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction”.
A game table characterized by that.

Conventionally, a game table provided with a production movable body is known. However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production movable body. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game stand having a characteristic of a production movable body. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game stand having a characteristic of a production movable body.
(Appendix f1)
A production movable body that can execute a movable operation to produce a game,
A decorative body with a window,
A gaming machine equipped with
Behind the decorative body, the effect movable body may perform an operation,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f2)
The gaming table described in Appendix f1,
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured to allow a player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f3)
The gaming machine described in Appendix f2,
An image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change due to the operation of the effect movable body.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f1 to f3,
The ornament is operable,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of executing variable display of symbols,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f6)
The gaming machine described in Appendix f5,
In the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, when the player can visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window of the ornament by the operation of the ornament, The jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbols than when the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image on the effectable movable body through the window of the decorative body. Is configured to
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the notice image,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f7)
The gaming table described in Appendix f5 or f6,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the image of the pre-reading hold icon on the effect movable body through the window portion of the decoration body by the operation of the decoration body, The hold corresponding to the hold icon has been digested and started, as compared with the case where a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body is not visible to the player through the window. As the final result of the variable display of the symbols, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be easily displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f1 to f7,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f9)
A production movable body that can execute a movable operation to produce a game,
A decorative body with a window,
Symbol display means,
A second image display means including an image display,
A first image display means different from the second image display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The second image display means is capable of performing a first movement behind the decorative body,
The effect movable body is the second image display means,
During the execution of the first movement, by displaying an image of the design moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction on the second image display means, the design is changed to the first direction. It is possible to show the player that it is not moving in the direction,
In a state before the second image display means performs the first movement, an image of a part of the design (hereinafter, referred to as “first design”) is displayed by the second image display means. Does not fit in the area and is not displayed on the second image display means,
By laterally moving a predetermined distance in the first direction by the first movement of the second image display means, the first display or the second display may be performed,
The first display is a display in which the first image as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the second image display means,
The second display is a display in which the second image as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the second image display means,
The first image and the second image are different images,
During execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, when the second display is performed rather than when the first display is performed, the big hit symbol aspect is after the symbol variation display. Easy to confirm
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f10)
The gaming table described in Appendix f9,
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is possible for a player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f11)
The gaming table described in Appendix f10,
An image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change due to the operation of the effect movable body.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f9 to f11,
The ornament is operable,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f13)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f9 to f12,
In the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, when the player can visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window of the ornament by the operation of the ornament, The jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbols than when the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image on the effectable movable body through the window of the decorative body. ,
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the notice image,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f14)
The gaming table described in Appendix f13,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the image of the pre-reading hold icon on the effect movable body through the window portion of the decoration body by the operation of the decoration body, The hold corresponding to the hold icon has been digested and started, as compared with the case where a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body is not visible to the player through the window. As the final result of the variable display of the symbols, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f15)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f9 to f14,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f16)
A first image display means,
A second image display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The second image display means is an image display means capable of performing the first movement,
The first movement is a movement of a predetermined distance in the first direction in the second display means,
After the first movement of the second image display means is started, first display or second display may be performed,
An image of the first pattern moved in a second direction opposite to the first direction during execution of the first movement is displayed to the player so that the pattern does not move in the first direction. Can be shown,
The first display is a display in which the first image as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the second image display means,
The second display is a display in which the second image as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the second image display means,
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display, the case where the second display is performed is easier than the case where the first display is performed, and the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f17)
The gaming table described in Appendix f16,
In a state before the second image display means executes the first movement, the image of the first pattern does not fit in the display area of the second image display means, and the second image Not displayed on the display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f18)
The gaming table according to appendix f16 or f17,
It has a decorative body with a window,
It is possible for the player to visually recognize the image of the second image display means through the window.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f19)
The gaming table described in Appendix f18,
It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the first image display means through the window.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f20)
The gaming table described in Appendix f18 or f19,
The operation of the second image display means may change the image of the second image display means visually recognized by the player through the window.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f21)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f18 to f20,
The ornament is operable,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f22)
The gaming machine according to Appendix f21,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the image on the second image display means through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament during the execution of the variable display of symbols, The jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display, as compared with the case where a part of the image on the second image display means is not visible to the player through the window of the ornament. Easy,
A part of the image in the second image display means is an image of at least a part of the notice image,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f23)
The gaming table described in appendix f22,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the image of the pre-reading hold icon in the second image display means through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament, the decoration is performed. The hold corresponding to the hold icon is more digested than when the player could not visually recognize a part of the image of the hold icon in the second image display means in the look-ahead mode through the window of the body. The jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display started by
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f24)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f16 to f23,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g1)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is capable of performing a rotation operation,
The image display means in which the rotating operation is performed may display the first image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g2)
The gaming table described in Appendix g1,
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g3)
The gaming table described in Appendix g2,
The second image does not rotate when the rotation operation is performed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g3,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image that has been cut off in the image display means before the rotation operation is performed may be displayed on the image display means by the rotation operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g4,
When the rotation operation is performed, the image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation may be cut off in the image display unit by the rotation operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 First decorative symbol display device 224 Rendering movable body 226 General winning opening 228, 229 Universal drawing starting opening 230 Special drawing 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 232a Blade member 234 Variable winning opening 234a Door member

Claims (9)

A first image display means,
A second image display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The second image display means is an image display means capable of performing the first movement,
The first movement is a movement of a predetermined distance in the first direction in the second display means,
After the first movement of the second image display means is started, first display or second display may be performed,
An image of the first pattern moved in a second direction opposite to the first direction during execution of the first movement is displayed to the player so that the pattern does not move in the first direction. Can be shown,
The first display is a display in which the first image as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the second image display means,
The second display is a display in which the second image as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the second image display means,
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display, the case where the second display is performed is easier than the case where the first display is performed, and the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1,
In a state before the second image display means executes the first movement, the image of the first pattern does not fit in the display area of the second image display means, and the second image Not displayed on the display means,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1 or 2,
It has a decorative body with a window,
It is possible for the player to visually recognize the image of the second image display means through the window.
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 3,
It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the first image display means through the window.
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 3 or 4,
The operation of the second image display means may change the image of the second image display means visually recognized by the player through the window.
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 3 to 5,
The ornament is operable,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 6,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the image on the second image display means through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament during the execution of the variable display of symbols, The jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display, as compared with the case where a part of the image on the second image display means is not visible to the player through the window of the ornament. Easy,
A part of the image in the second image display means is an image of at least a part of the notice image,
A game table characterized by that. The game machine according to claim 7,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the image of the pre-reading hold icon in the second image display means through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament, the decoration is performed. The hold corresponding to the hold icon is more digested than when the player could not visually recognize a part of the image of the hold icon in the second image display means in the look-ahead mode through the window of the body. The jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display started by
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

Images